RW · E-5 BIB · Entry 10 of 13 · Publication

LOGISTICS SPECIALIST (LS)

NAVEDTRA 15004D · CHAPTER 2

CHAPTER 2

p. 76

LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification Rev. MAR 2013 2-2

FEDERAL CATALOG SYSTEM

National Stock Number

The national stock number (NSN) for an item of supply consists of a four digit FSC group and class and a nine-digit national item identification number (NIIN). The NIIN consists of a two-digit national codification bureau (NCB) code (which will be discussed separately) and seven digits in conjunction with the NCB code, uniquely identify each NSN item in the Federal supply distribution system. (Figure 2-2) shows the elements of an NSN in the order they are written.

MATERIAL COGNIZANCE

The term material cognizance refers to the inventory manager and technical advisor of each category of material in the supply system. A category of Navy material is a major grouping of items for supply management purposes. The list of cognizance symbols (COGs) can be found in the Naval Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, Appendix 18.

Navy Material

Cognizance symbols are two-character, alphanumeric codes prefixed to national stock numbers. The first character of the cognizance symbol identifies the store's account. The following information refers to the first character of the cognizance symbol:

1, 3, 5, 7 Material is held in the Navy Stock Account (NSA). When this material is issued, it must be paid for by the requisitioner.

9 Material purchased by the Defense Stock Fund and held in NSA. When this material is issued, it must be paid for by the requisitioner.

2, 4, 6, 8 Material held in the Appropriations Purchase Account or non-stores account. This material is issued without charge to the requisitioner.

0 Material is not carried in the stores account.

The second part of the cognizance symbol is a single-letter code that designates the inventory manager or inventory control point (ICP) that has cognizance, or control, of the material. These inventory managers may be Navy or Defense activities.

Cognizance Symbol

A two-part cognizance symbol is used by the Navy to provide supply management information. There are 94 cognizance symbols currently in use. The majority of stock transactions aboard ship use cognizance symbols 1H, 9B and 9Q. Refer to Naval Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, for additional information. The cognizance symbols frequently encountered by the LS are listed in (Figure 2-1). To understand cognizance symbols, you must understand the following terms:

• Stores Account: This is an account reflecting the value of material, supplies and similar property on hand. The accounts used by the LSs are the Appropriation Purchases Account (APA) and the Navy Stock Account (NSA)

• APA: This account is for all stock material paid for out of appropriations. This material is not charged to cataloging, identification, determination of requirements, procurement, inspection, storage and distribution of categories of material

p. 77

LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification Rev. MAR 2013 2-3

• Technical responsibility: This is the systems command or office that determines the technical characteristics of equipment. For example, the electronics equipment characteristics include items such as circuitry and the types and arrangement of components

• Expense type item: This term identifies stock items that are financed by the Defense Business Operating Fund and are the same as NSA items

• Consumable: Consumable material is material that is consumed in normal use. Some of the examples of these materials are paints, cleaning supplies, office supplies and common tools.

p. 78

2-4 Rev. MAR 2013

LS: Chapter 2-Material Identification

COGSDIBOL COG)UZ... t\..'.'H 1::--IVE::-ITORY H.<\..'.lAGER STORES ACCOlNT IECH:\!1CAL RESPO::--ISIBIUTY

DEf i::'{ITI0::--1

01 N AVSU PWSS Philadel ph ia

::--lone

Yarious commands

Publications II DLA Document Services ::--ISA DLA Documen t Servi ces Forms

lR

NAVSUP WSS Ph iladel phia

::--ISA

::--laval Air Systems Command Aeronautical, photographic, and meteorological material (consumable or expense type material)

-tR

NAVSUP WSS Ph iladel phia

APA

::--laval Air Systems Command Catapult and arresting gear material (repairable or investment type material) -tY ::--laval Air Systems Command APA ::--laval Air Systems Command Aircraft engines

-t Z N AVSU P WSS Phi ladel phia

APA ::--laval Air Systems Command

Airborne armament equipment

5R

NAVSU PWSS Phi ladel ph ia

::--ISA

::--la\·al Air Systems Command Catapult and arresting gear material (consumable or expense type material)

6R

NA VSUPWSS Philadel phia

APA

::--laval Air Systems Command Aviation ground support equipment (repairable or im·estment type material) 6\' ::--laval Air System Command APA ::--laval Air Systems Command Technical directive change kit

7R NA VSU PWSS Philadel phia

::--ISA ::--laval Air Systems Command Depot-level repairable aviation material

9C (9B)* DLA Land a nd Ma ritime ::--ISA

Fleet :\1aterial Support Office ::--la\)"-0\\1led stocks ofdefens.e construction material

9D (9B)*

DLA Troop Su pport

::--ISA

Fleet :\!aterial Support Office ::--la\)"-0\\1led stocks of clothing, textiles, and related items managed by DPSC

9G (9B)*

DLA Aviation

::--ISA Fleet :\1aterial Support Office ::--la\)"-0\\1led stocks of defense general material

9::--1 (9B)* DLA La nd a nd Ma ri ti m e

::--ISA Fleet :\1aterial Support Office ::--la,;,·-0\\1led stocks of defense electronic material

9Q

General Sen·ices Administration

::--ISA

Various commands ::--la\)"-0\\1led stocks of items accepted by the GSA for support of ::--Ia\;,· requirements

9Z (9B)*

DLA Troop Support

::--ISA

\'arious commands ::--la\y-0\\1led stocks of defense industrial material ::--IOTE: *DLA BS:\1 initiative has merged most Defense Supply Center material to 9B cognizance symbol

p. 79

2-5 Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Figure 2-1 — Cognizance Symbols Commonly Encountered by the LS.

Material Control Codes

A Material Control Code (MCC) is a single alphabetic character assigned by the inventory manager. It is used to segregate items into manageable groupings (fast, medium, or slow movers) or to relate to field activities special reporting and control requirements. Refer to Supply Appendices of NAVSUP P-485 that provides a listing of material control codes. The MCC occupies card column 73 of the transaction detail card or MILSTRIP requisition. Table 2-1 contains a list of material control codes commonly encountered by the LS.

Table 2-1 — A list of Material Control Codes Commonly Encountered by the LS

Federal Supply Classification System

The Federal Supply Classification (FSC) system is designed to classify all items of supply used by the Federal Government. Each item of supply is classified in one and only one, four-digit Federal Supply Class. The first two digits denote the group or major division of commodities while the last two digits denote the class or subdivision of commodities within a group. As presently established, the FSC consists of 78 groups (some currently unassigned). These stock groups cover rather broad categories of material. Therefore, they are subdivided into classes. There are approximately 600 classes assigned to the 78 groups.

The number of classes within each group varies. Each class covers a particular area of commodities, in accordance with their physical or performance characteristics, or based on the fact that the items in the class are usually requisitioned or issued together. You will learn the frequently used classes within the groups by using them. Examples of how the classes are used to divide types of material are shown in (Figure 2-1). Together, the stock group and class are known as the FSC.

The web-enabled Defense Logistics Agency Cataloging Handbook, (H2), contains a complete listing of assigned federal supply classification classes. This DLA handbook is also available in CDROM.

Federal Supply Classification

p. 80

2-6 Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

The Federal Supply Classification (FSC) is a four-digit number that occupies the first part of an NSN. The Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) Cataloging Handbook H2 lists the groups and classes in use today. The Defense Logistics Information Service (DLIS), Battle Creek, Michigan, is responsible for managing this handbook.

Figure 2-2 — Examples of supply classes within a stock group. National Codification Bureau (NCB) Code

The NCB code is a two-digit code that occupies the fifth and sixth position of a NATO stock number. This code identifies the NATO country that originally cataloged the item of supply. Table 2-4 shows the NCB codes currently assigned. The NSN assigned by United States uses NCB codes “00" and “01." The different NCB codes may be assigned to different materials, but they are identified by the same NIINs. For example, material assigned with NIIN 00-005-9895 is a terminal block and 01-005- 9895 is a panel assembly. It is very important that you use the last nine digits of the NSN to identify the required material.

p. 81

2-7 Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Table 2-2 — National Codification Bureau (NCB) Codes

National Item Identification Number

The national item identification number (NIIN) is a nine-digit number that identifies each item of supply used by the DoD. The NIIN indexes or relates to identification data information that makes it different from every other item. The amount and type of identification data depends on the item and its intended use. Although the NIIN is part of the NSN, it is used to independently identify an item. Except for identification lists, most federal supply catalogs are arranged in NIIN order.

Stock records are also maintained in NIIN order as well as load lists and consolidated allowance lists.

Special Material Identification Codes

A special material identification code (SMIC) adds information to the National Stock Number. The inventory managers assign the SMIC to provide visibility to selected items and to ensure maintenance of their technical integrity. The requests for assignment of SMIC codes are forwarded to NAVSUP for processing. The SMICs are made up of two alpha or numeric characters and are reflected in card columns 21-22 of MILSTRIP documents. The SMIC may be assigned by an inventory manager to an item when it requires the following:

• Control in source, quality, technical design or configuration requirements

• Control in procurement, stocking and issue

• Special receipt, inspection, testing, storage or handling

p. 82

2-8 Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

• Weapon system applicability.

The first character of the SMIC has no meaning by itself. For example, the second position “F” signifies fighter aircraft. The letter in the first position breaks down the general type of fighter aircraft into specific models. For more information, refer to NAVSUP P-485 Volume II, Appendix 14, for a complete list of assigned SMICs The following are some examples of these breakdowns:

• BF F-4 Fighter aircraft

• EF F-8 Fighter aircraft

• FF F-9 Fighter aircraft

• MF F-4 Fighter aircraft

• PF F-14 Fighter aircraft

• SF F-18 Fighter aircraft.

The second position of the SMIC assigned by the Naval Inventory Control Point (NAVSUP WSS) identifies the applicable weapons system or equipment. Most of the SMICs you will use are NAVSUP WSS assigned codes and these are the codes discussed in this chapter. For more information, refer to NAVSUP P-485, Volume II, Appendix 14, for a complete listing of assigned SMICs. The following is a listing of the second character of an SMIC that you will usually encounter:

• A—At tack aircraft

• C—Car go/transport aircraft

• E—S pecial electronic aircraft

• F—Fi ghter aircraft

• H—Helico pters

• N—Je t engines

• P—P atrol aircraft

• Q—T urbo prop engines

• S—A ntisubmarine aircraft

• T— Trainer or cargo/transport aircraft.

The SMICs are made up of various combinations of letters and numbers. This combination of letters and numbers might be the same but have a different meaning when used by other inventory managers. Some of these inventory managers are NAVSUP WSS-MECH Project Officer, NAVAIR, Naval Mine Warfare Engineering Activity (NWEA), NAVSUP and Naval Sea Systems Command (NAVSEA). You must use NAVSUP P-485, Volume II, Appendix 14, as your reference when conducting technical research to make sure the information used is correct. (Figure 2-3) shows an example of an NSN with SMIC.

p. 83

2-9 Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Figure 2-3 — An example of a national stock number with a special material identification code.

Navy Item Control Number

As we have discussed in a previous paragraph, NSNs are required for all items centrally managed or bought for supply system stock. With changes of equipment and products, the Navy buys new items from the suppliers. New items entering the Navy supply system are identified in time to permit assignment of NSNs before shipment. In numerous instances, the Navy Item Control Number (NICN) is used to identify the items before an NSN can be assigned (Figure 2-4). Some items are permanently identified by the NICN because of the nature of the items. The NICN designation includes the following:

• Inventory Control Points (ICP) control numbers

• Kit numbers

• Publications and forms ordering numbers

• Local Navy Activity Control (NAC) numbers

• Other locally assigned numbers.

The NICN is a 13-digit number that identifies an item of supply. It is composed of the following parts: Federal Supply Classification (FSC) code (numbers that occupy the first four digits of the NICN); Navy Item Control (NIC) number code (letters that occupy the 5th and 6th position); and Serial number (alphanumeric and occupies the 7th through 13th position).

The NIC number codes that you must be familiar with are listed in table 2-3. These codes differentiate the types of NICN. Refer to Naval Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, for additional information.

Figure 2-4 — Navy item control number to national item identification number.

p. 84

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Table 2-3 — Navy Item Control Number (NICN) Codes

Permanent LL Coded NICNs

The NICNs with “LL” in the 5th and 6th positions and a “C” in the 7th position mean that the ICPs or other Navy item managers (including field activities) assigned them. Its purpose is to identify and monitor non-stocked items that are not expected to have enough demand to qualify for NSN assignment. The NICNs are assigned to permit the maintenance of a complete and uniform inventory control point weapons system file. It is also used to ensure that selected items are considered for inclusion in future allowance lists. Stock points must purchase items identified by this type of NICN Stock points currently do not have the capability to translate permanent LL coded NICNs to applicable CAGEs and part numbers. The items are requisitioned using the DoD Single Line Item Requisition System Document, DD 1348-6 format (part number requisition) or Non-NSN Requisition, NAVSUP Form 1250-2.

Temporary LL Coded NICNs

The Defense Logistics Information Service (DLIS) uses temporary NICNs to identify and control items pending assignment of NSN. These NICNs enables the item manager to establish and maintain automated file records, to ease procurement action and to maximize automated processing of requisitions.

The cognizant item managers review the temporary NICNs periodically to convert them to NSN or to delete the ones that are no longer required. When a requisition identifies an item by a temporary NICN that has been converted to an NSN, the status card will include the new NSN in card columns 8 through 22 and status code “BG” in card column 65-66. Refer to the MILSTRIP/MILSTRAP Deskguide, NAVSUP 409, for status code research. You should update the stock/custody records and copies of outstanding requisitions as soon as you receive this information. The NAVCIP is responsible for maintaining NICN to NSN cross-reference list. For activities that use FED-LOG, searching by NICN to view the associated NSN is one of the options that can be used during technical research.

Local Item Control Number

Local item control numbers (LICN) may be assigned to shipboard stocked consumable items that are not identified by an NSN, a NATO stock number, or another type of NICN. A LICN consists of 13 characters. The first four numbers correspond to the FSC of similar NSN items, the fifth and sixth (NCB code area) are “LL,” and the remaining seven are all numbers (Figure 2-5).

p. 85

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Figure 2-5 — An example of a local item control number.

Locally assigned item control numbers are authorized for local use only (i.e., for shipboard stock records, locator records, bin tags, issue documents, etc.)... They are not used for requisitions since they would be meaningless to the supply source.

Technical Manual Identification Numbering System (TMINS)

The TMINS is a plan for classifying, indexing and numbering Navy technical manuals to encourage standardization and modernization. The 13-character number, patterned after the 13-digit national stock number, serves both as the technical manual identification number and as the number used to requisition a particular technical manual. TMINS numbers are authorized for use on DD Forms 1348 or message requisitions in DD Form 1348 form at using RIC A04 or A0D, as appropriate. Refer to Naval Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, for further information on the TMINS.

Part Number

The part number, also called reference number, is an identification number assigned to an item by the manufacture. It is made up of letters, numbers, or combinations of both. When used with the CAGE code, it identifies the item. It is used with other technical data (for example, model, series and end-use application) to requisition an item when an NSN is not assigned. Part number to NSN cross-reference is provided in FED-LOG, or any computers that contain Master Cross Reference List (MCRL) information. Requisitioning procedures for part number requisition are described in Naval Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485.

Commercial and Government Entity Code

The Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code replaces the Federal Supply Code for Manufacturers (FSCM). The CAGE is a five-digit, numeric code assigned to different types of activities for identification. The CAGE for vendors who supply an item but do not manufacture it is identified by an alphabetic character in the second position; for example, 113234. Other NATO manufacturers of items used in the U.S. supply system use CAGE with an alphabetic character in the first position, e.g., K7654. The web-enabled Defense Logistics Agency Cataloging Handbook (H4) provides a list of CAGE codes and activity names. CAGE is also listed in the database for FED LOG users.

Stock Measurement

Accurate measurement of stock is very important. When identifying either material or requirements, you should consult the stock list to be sure you are making the right measurements accurately. For most purposes, a steel measuring tape is accurate enough. For lightweight sheet metal or wire, a wire

p. 86

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

and thickness gauge is necessary. Stock identification lists contain tables for converting gauge to decimal or fractional parts of an inch.

SYMBOLS AND MARKINGS

As an aid to identification and as a safety precaution, many items are marked by symbols, codes and serial numbers.

Symbols

In addition to the NSN, symbols and color codes are used on certain metal products and compressed gas cylinders. These are used primarily by technicians to quickly identify these products and by you for storage purposes. In ordering and expending, the NSN should be used.

Metal Products

Marking of iron and steel (ferrous) and other metal (nonferrous) products is covered by FEDSTD-183C, Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products, which provides for continuous marking.

The term “continuous identification marking” means that the marking appears at set intervals on a piece of stock. It is put on with a heavy ink, similar to paint. When a piece of bar stock is cut, each piece should carry the proper identification. The markings must give: (1) the producer’s name or registered trademark and (2) the commercial designation of the material.

Marking terms for the various commercial designations are found in FED-STD- 183C, Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products.

Some iron and steel products are not included in the continuous identification marking system outlined in FED-STD-183C, Continuous Identification Marking of Iron and Steel Products. Required markings for these products are included in the material specifications. For example, boiler tubes are not marked continuously, but Navy specifications covering boiler tubes usually require that tubes of a certain size be marked at each end. Smaller tubes than those covered in the specifications may be bundled and tagged. NAVSUP P485 and FED-STD-183C contain information on how and where these markings must appear on various metal products.

Compress Gas Cylinders

A common color code for compressed gas cylinders is published in MIL-STD-101B, Color Code for Pipelines & for Compressed Gas Cylinders and NAVSUP P-485 to provide a visual warning to supplement the identification or title lettered on the cylinders, facilitate the segregation of these cylinders at depots and promote greater safety.

Cylinders are color coded as a visual aid in identifying the gas contained therein. However, complete dependence for identification should not be placed upon the color coding. Positive identification of each gas depends upon the stenciled name and color code of the cylinder and the indented name on the valve body (Figure 2-6).

p. 87

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Figure 2-6 — Color codes for compressed gas cylinders.

Numerical Markings

To facilitate identification, certain technical material may bear numerical markings assigned either by direction of the responsible command or by the manufacturer. These numbers are used in maintaining records on the material and appear on all vouchers, records, custody cards and survey reports.

Manufacturer’s Serial Numbers

Manufacturers’ serial numbers may be etched on the material or in case of portable and installed equipment may be attached to the equipment by nameplates. Information usually included on nameplates includes the manufacturer’s name, make or model number, serial number, size and voltage.

p. 88

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Other Numbers

DRAWING NUMBERS. Certain technical materials are identified by a drawing or sketch number assigned by the controlling bureau or systems command or by the manufacturer and must appear on all requisitions when a stock number is not assigned.

JCEC NOMENCLATURE. Some items of electronic equipment are identified by Joint Commu- nications Electronics Committee (JCEC) nomenclature (AN/UYK-5(V)) or Navy type (R-390A/URR) or model number (MK 9 MOD 2) as well as stock and serial number. In addition, mark and modification numbers identify major units of fire control radar equipment.

MARK AND MODIFICATION NUMBER— Ordnance material usually is given a mark and modification number, a drawing number and a piece number. These serve to identify the part and facilitate reference to ordnance publications. Ordnance equipment may also be serially numbered, giving individual identity to units that are physically alike. This number is stamped on certain ordnance equipment, such as a rifle or pistol, to facilitate identification of the manufacturer and to place responsibility for custody.

SOURCES OF MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION

This chapter presents different sources of information that are needed in performing technical research. Material identification does not end with the assignment of the NSN. Some means of identifying other particular needs by the stock number must be provided to the customers. This includes the means of determining the correct quantities of these items to carry in stock. Identification of needs may be determined by using the lists described in the following paragraphs.

• Management List-Navy—p rovides current data for requisitioning purposes (unit/issue/ price, etc.).

• Allowance Lists—c ontain the items authorized and recommended quantities that should be on hand and provide descriptive data that associate a material requirement to an NSN.

• Load Lists—r eflect the range and depth of material carried by Combat Logistics Forces (CLF) ships (including tenders and repair ships), or bases to fulfill assigned supply support of fleet units.

PUBLICATIONS, LISTS AND CATALOGS

All Logistics Specialist should become proficient in the use of various Federal Catalog System and Naval Supply Systems Command (NAVSUP) publications.

Complete and accurate management data must be available for requisitioning purposes and for effective financial and inventory control of material. The Management List-Navy (ML-N) provides the basic management data. Related publications supplement the ML-N by providing additional management data or by consolidating certain information for reference purposes.

Publications cover data using the format of the national stock number (NSN) and national item identification number (NIIN). The short descriptions of what is contained in each publication should be used as a first step in obtaining required material identification and management data.

Federal Logistic Data

Federal Logistics Data (CD-ROM) is available to access DoD logistics data. It replaces the cumbersome data retrieval process of the microfiche media used for earlier Federal Catalog System

p. 89

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

(FCS) and Navy unique publications. It is also an interactive query system using the following types of search criteria:

• Part Number

• Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE)

• National Item Identification Number (NIIN)

• National/NATO Stock Number (NSN)

• Permanent System Control Number

• Supplier Name

• Item name, Navy Item Control Number (NICN)

• Engine Number

• Master Repairable Item List (MRIL)

• Shipping Code

The Federal Logistics Catalog reduces the time required to access the information needed to identify and order supplies. It also contains extracts of data found in the following FCS publications:

• Management List-Navy (ML-N)

• Management List-Consolidated (ML-C)

• Master Cross Reference List (MCRL)

• Federal Logistics Data Record (FILDR)

• Identification List (IL)

• Interchangeability and Substitutability (I and S)

• Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE)

• Federal Supply Classification Groups and Classes (H2)

• Freight, Selected Federal Item Name Directory for Supply Cataloging Data (H-6). Navy unique publications consist of the following: • List of Items Requiring Special Handling (LIRSH)

• Master Repairable Item List (MRIL)

• Navy Item Control Number to National Item Identification Number (NICN-NIIN) Cross Reference.

The FED LOG CD-ROMs are replaced as the data gets updated monthly via automatic distribution. Refer to FED LOG User’s Manual for detailed information and operation instructions for the system.

General Services Administration Federal Supply Catalog

The General Services Administration (GSA) Federal Supply Catalog lists approximately 20,000 line items that are stocked in GSA supply distribution facilities. The items listed in this catalog are assigned cognizance 9Q. The GSA Federal Supply Catalog serves as the major merchandising instrument of the Federal Supply Service (FSS) Stock Program and consists of a guide and six

p. 90

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

commodity categories such as office supplies; hospitality supplies; industrial supplies; safety products; great outdoors; and tools and hardware.

The GSA Supply Catalog also contains consolidated alphabetical and NSN indexes to all stock items. The NSN indexes are listed in stock number sequence under assigned group and class. It provides detailed information concerning the program and requisitioning procedures.

Afloat Shopping Guide

The Afloat Shopping Guide (ASG) is designed to assist the fleet in identifying the NSN items that are most frequently requested by ships. The ASG is a part of the Naval Logistics Library (NLL) that is distributed in CD-ROM format. It includes the following:

• A detailed description of each item

• A specific code to designate items carried by combat logistics forces (CLF) ships

• The stock numbers of substitute items, if any

• The specifications for illustrations or diagrams of many types of material. Refer to (Figure 2-7) for a sample page from the ASG.

Navy Stock List of Publications, Forms and Directives

The Navy Stock List of Publications, Forms and Directives, NAVSUP P-2003, is part of the NLL. The research options in the CD-ROM allow you to find the item by inserting the NSN form, or publication number and the title/nomenclature in the edit fields. You may use an asterisk (*) at the end of words in a search field to expand the search term. For example, entering “CHI*” will find all records containing words beginning with “CHI.” The asterisk cannot be used in date or numeric fields.

Hazardous Material Information System

The DoD Hazardous Material Information System (HMIS) provides information concerning the use, procurement, receipt, storage and expenditure of hazardous material. Detailed information on HMIS can be found in the Hazardous Material Control and Management, OPNAVINST 4110.2. The NAVSUPSYSCOM maintains and distributes the HMIS hazardous item list. This list includes information concerning hazardous ingredients, use of hazardous material, protective clothing and emergency treatment.

p. 91

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Figure 2-7 — A sample page from the afloat shopping guide.

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

An Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB) is prepared by the manufacturer for each model aircraft, engine, accessory, electronic equipment, support equipment, or other aeronautical equipment considered advisable by NAVAIR. The IPB is printed and issued by the authority of NAVAIR. It is used as reference for identifying and ordering replacement items. Each item of equipment is listed in assembly breakdown order, with the illustration placed as close as possible to its appropriate listing.

p. 92

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Some IPBs have a different format from others. You can familiarize yourself with the various formats of IPBs by using the technical library. Each of the IPBs usually includes the following sections:

The TABLE OF CONTENTS shows the breakdown of publication into sections. It also furnishes an alphabetical listing of the various assemblies and lists the page, work package, or figures where they are illustrated

The GROUP ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST is the main text of the publication. It consists of series of illustrations and parts list in which parts of the aircraft or equipment are shown in assembly breakdown order. The items in the illustration pages are identified by index numbers. These index numbers match the numbers listed in the parts list of the assembly breakdown. The parts list is arranged in numerical sequence by index number to make it easier to use. The information in the parts list include index number, part number, description, units per assembly, Usable On code and the Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SM&R) code. Each major assembly in the parts list is followed immediately by its component parts or subassemblies. Component parts listed in the description column may be prefixed with a dot or indented to show their relationship. You should use this information to identify and obtain the required material in accordance with the SM&R code. The numerical index of the IPB lists all parts in reference/part number sequence. Each reference/part number is cross-referenced to the figure and index number or the work package where the item is listed in the text.

Maintenance Manuals

The maintenance or technical manuals provide procedures for conducting maintenance to aircraft equipments and components. They also provide a list of materials required to do the maintenance. The list consists of reference/part numbers and a description of material.

Aviation Cross-Reference Listings

Naval Inventory Control Point publications P-2300, P-2310, P-2330, C0018 and C0030 are published in CD-ROM format. These publications are described in the following paragraphs

P-2300. Lists repairable assemblies under the cognizance of NAVSUP WSS or Naval Air Systems Command (NAVAIR).

P-2310. Lists supporting repair parts of Navy aviation material. It serves as master reference list for identifying and requisitioning all parts of replacement significance required to support the repairable assemblies listed in Section P-2300.

P-2330. This is the family group cross-reference. It provides additional information of interchangeability data shown in P-2300 and P-2310. It shows the relationship of repairable components with the others in the family group. This is indicated by Family Relationship (REL) code. An “H” in this column means the NSN is the head of the family and an “M” means member of the family.

C0018. The Repairable Assemblies Model Code Table of Navy Aviation Materials. This publication lists the model codes shown in P-2300 with applicable NSN or coded NICN The list of NSNs are prefixed with cognizance codes and material control codes and suffixed, as applicable, with SMICs. The NICN is a nine-character letter and number code that identifies an item pending the assignment of an NSN.

C0030. The Packaging Data for NAVSUP WSS and NAVAIR Repairable Assemblies. It provides information in the proper ways of protecting material for shipment.

p. 93

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

Other NAVSUP WSS publications that are not in CD-ROM format are listed and described in the following paragraphs.

CRIPL-01. Consolidated Remain In Place List. This list is designed to improve management of repairable components by identifying the Remain-In-Place (RIP) items. These items are repairable components that cannot be removed until receipt of a replacement item. The NSNs listed in the CRIPL are authorized RIP items. The CRIPL has three parts. Part 1 is in NIIN sequence, Part 2 is in part number sequence and Part 3 is in NIIN sequence within aircraft type.

NAC-10. Provides cross-reference from part numbers to Navy Activity Control (NAC) numbers of the Aviation Supply Distribution System. This publication allows usage of available un-stock numbered items by advertising them.

ICRL-A and ICRL-C. The Individual Component Repair List provides maintenance activities with ability to relate maintenance capability to repairable components. The ICRL-A lists repairable processed by a specific maintenance activity and the local repair capability for the item. The ICRL-C is combined ICRL for all intermediate maintenance activities (IMA).

Allowance Lists

Allowance lists specify the type and quantity of equipment, equipage, repair parts and supporting materials that a ship in commission is required to carry on board.

Coordinated Shipboard Allowance List

The Coordinated Shipboard Allowance List (COSAL) is the most used allowance list for determining repair part NSNs. The COSAL is developed and published by the NAVSUP WSS, Mechanicsburg, PA. It contains items authorized and recommended quantities that should be on hand and provides descriptive data that associates a material requirement to an NSN. The use of the COSAL is described in the COSAL Use and Maintenance Manual, NAVSUP WSSINST. 4441.170 (Series).

The Aviation Consolidated Allowance List

The Aviation Consolidated Allowance List (AVCAL) contains a list of items authorized that should be on hand to support aviation equipment. The AVCAL is developed and published by the NAVSUP WSS, Philadelphia, PA. The AVCAL lists the items and quantities of aeronautical material authorized to be stocked by CV/CVN/LHA/LHD ship types to support the maintenance and operations of embarked aircraft. It is tailored for each ship and the items listed are selected from all Allowance Requirement Registers (ARRs)/Allowance Lists (ALs) that apply to the embarked aircraft. The allowance quantities are based on the ship's demand records.

Load Lists

Load lists reflect the range and depth of material carried by Combat Logistics Forces (CLF) ships (including tenders and repair ships), or bases. Similarly, like allowance lists, provide descriptive data that associates a material requirement to an NSN. The use of load lists is described in the NAVSUP P-485.

SOURCE, MAINTENANCE AND RECOVERABILITY CODES

The SM&R codes consist of two-position source code, two single-position maintenance codes, single-position recoverability code and if applicable, a single-position service option code. (Figure 2-8)

p. 94

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

is an example of SM&R Code. Its component codes are described in the following paragraphs. Table 2-5 describes the Joint Services Uniform SM&R Code Format. You must be familiar with the codes used in SM&R, as described in the Joint Regulation Governing the use and Application of Uniform Source Maintenance and Recoverability Codes, OPNAVINST 4410.2 (series) and the Navy Uniform Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) Codes, NAVSUPINST 4423.29(series).

Figure 2-8 — An example of a Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SM&R) code.

Table 2-4 — Joint Services Uniform SM&R Code Format

The Source Code is a two-character code that occupies the first two positions of the SM&R code format. This code shows the manner of getting the material needed for maintenance, repair, or rework of items. The following paragraphs describe the general categories of source codes.

The P-Series Source codes identify items that are centrally procured. These items (except PF items) are procured and stocked in the supply system.

The K-Series Source codes identify the items that are included in kits and do not/will not have an NSN assigned.

The M-Series Source codes identify the items that are authorized for manufacture or fabrication at some level of maintenance. These items are normally consumable or those requiring very limited repair. Some typical “M” coded items include hose assemblies, tubing and name plates. The specified

p. 95

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

level of maintenance must have all the manufacturing data, shop equipment and skills available to manufacture the items.

The A-Series Source codes identify the items that are authorized for assembly at some level of maintenance. These codes can be assigned to an item when all parts of the assembly, support equipment and skills are available at the level of maintenance.

The X-Series Source codes identify items for which no demand is anticipated.

The Maintenance codes are two-position codes that show the level of maintenance authorized to use, remove or replace and repair items. Maintenance codes occupy the third and fourth positions of the SM&R code format.

The maintenance code entered in the third position indicates the maintenance level authorized to use, remove and replace the support item. When used for end items, maintenance tools, test and support equipment items, a code in this position indicates the lowest level of maintenance authorized to use this item.

The maintenance code entered in the fourth position indicates whether the item is to be repaired. It also identifies the lowest level of maintenance to accomplish overhaul, repair, or assembly of the item.

The Recoverability code occupies the fifth position of the SM&R code format. This code indicates the recoverability potential of the item. It also indicates the final disposition of unserviceable items. For repairable items, this code means the maintenance level responsible for repair, condemnation and disposal of the item.

The procedures for submitting SM&R code change request are outlined the Navy Uniform Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) Codes, NAVSUPINST 4423.29 (series) provides detailed instructions for preparing the SM&R code change request form, NAVAIR Form 4423/1.

TECHNICAL LIBRARY MANAGEMENT

The Central Technical Publications Library (CTPL) provides a source of current information needed by supply and maintenance personnel. The quality assurance/analysis (QA/A) division of Aircraft Intermediate Maintenance Department (AIMD) manages the CTPL. This function includes updating the publications throughout the activity when AIMD is responsible for all aeronautical technical manuals for the activity. The LS may use the CTPL to verify or find technical information needed to do the job. Aviation support activities not adjacent to AIMD require a library with an appropriate number of publications necessary to conduct technical research. This library is a dispersed library of the AIMD CTPL and is usually located in the supply response section (SRS). The SRS supervisor is responsible for ensuring that all necessary technical publications are on hand and readily available in the library.

SUMMARY

As a Logistics Specialist, being able to conduct research and properly identifying material in order to initiate the requisition process is one of your primary duties. In this chapter, you have learned how to identify and understand specific characteristics assigned to each material carried by the Navy Supply System. You also learned how to identify unique symbols and markings assigned to special materials using variety of publications and instructions. In this chapter, you learned how to research the SM&R codes and gain an overall understanding of the supply and maintenance communities in order to provide proper logistics support. With new technology and changes in the supply system, the timely

p. 96

2-

Rev. MAR 2013 LS: Chapter 2— Material Identification

submission of feedback for updates of our technical libraries is a critical part in ensuring that our fleet is always mission ready.

p. 97

Rev. MAR 2013 3-1

CHAPTER 3

MATERIAL PROCUREMENT

The term procurement means an act of obtaining material or services from supply sources. In the Navy, procurement is a big undertaking. Think for a moment about the size of the Navy and the amount of material it needs to keep working.

The Navy’s procurement process involves customers, support activities and suppliers. The customers prepare requisitions and submit the completed forms to the supporting supply activity. Upon receipt of the requisition, the supporting supply activity checks the form for accuracy and correct information. When requested material is available, the supply activity processes the requisition for issue. If material is not available, the supply activity refers the requisition to the item manager or supporting stock points for issue. The suppliers of material can be a military or civilian organization. Material and services received from civilian vendors are those not available in the Navy’s supply system.

The supply department processes procurement requests to satisfy the customer’s needs or to restock supplies. The procedures and forms used in procurement may vary from activity to activity. The variations of the forms used depend on the local procedures set by the support activity. This chapter will assist in learning the procedures of obtaining the needed material to support your activity. Also, you will learn how to update and maintain the status of outstanding requisitions and perform material obligation validations (MOVs).

You will play an important role in the procurement of material for your command. You must understand what material is authorized, where to obtain it. You must also be familiar with the forms used in procurement and know how to prepare them.

This chapter presents the general responsibility for procurement and the methods normally used afloat.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Determine material requirements process factors for procuring equipment and supplies.

2. Recognize the procedures to procure material requirements within SERVMART.

3. Recognize special requisitioning and action taken to procure from other commands.

4. Identify the various sources of supply used in the supply system.

5. Identify and use different requisition documents submitted to source supply system activities to obtain material.

6. Recall the procedures for maintaining requisition files, automated and manual process.

7. Determine the procedures for making purchases and uphold the purchasing regulations.

CHAPTER 20

p. 505

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-2

Postal Insurance

Postal insurance is provided for articles with a value of at least $0.01 up to a maximum insured value of $25,000. This insurance is included in the registration fee. Postal insurance is not available for articles with no value ($0.00.) The mailer must inform the accepting clerk of the full value of an article presented for registration. The value of an article determines the fee charged for registry service. Private insurance carried on an article does not modify the requirement for declaring the article’s full value. Only articles of no value may be mailed as Registered Mail® without insurance.

The maximum amount of coverage available for Registered Mail® is $25,000. Additional fees collected for items valued over $25,000 are for handling purposes only. Refer to the DMM for declaration values. The value of official mail also must be declared when presented for mailing so that it may be given proper handling.

Negotiable and Non Negotiable Instruments

You need to know the meaning of the terms negotiable and nonnegotiable articles to understand how the values are determined. A negotiable item is any instrument that can be exchanged for cash or goods without the signature of the bearer. An example of a negotiable instrument is a gift certificate. All one has to do to receive the merchandise is to turn in the certificate.

Nonnegotiable instruments are items that in order to be exchanged for cash or merchandise require a bearer’s signature. Would an income tax check be considered a negotiable item? No. A tax return check requires a signature to cash it. Therefore, it is nonnegotiable.

Preparation by Sender

Postal employees are not permitted to assist in the preparation or sealing of mail to be registered. The mail must bear the complete names and addresses of both the mailer and addressee. Envelopes or packages that appear to have been opened and resealed, or that are otherwise improperly prepared, must not be registered. Padded envelopes may not be used for domestic Registered Mail®, but they may be used for international Registered Mail®.

Sealing

All sides of a parcel must be sealed completely (Figure 20-1). One of the main purposes for registering mail is to provide security against unauthorized openings. Where flaps are not completely sealed, tape must be used to ensure that no free edge is exposed. Such tape must be of a type that can absorb an ink impression, such as paper tape or cloth tape. Clear tape (scotch tape) and masking tape are not acceptable.

The mailer must securely seal envelopes. Self-sealing envelopes are not acceptable as Registered Mail® unless the envelopes are sealed with paper tape (Figure 20-2). Envelopes of strong construction may be accepted for mailing, as long as they are completely sealed. Envelopes sold by the USPS are ideally suited for registration. If tape is used to seal the flaps of letter-size envelopes, the tape must not be placed over the intersections of the flaps. A space on each side of the intersecting flaps must be left open for postmarks.

p. 506

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-3

Figure 20-1 — A parcel showing placement of the APDS for sealing.

Figure 20-2 — A self-sealing envelope sealed with paper tape.

Packaging

All articles presented for registration must be packaged following the procedures in the DMM. As the accepting clerk, you may refuse to accept an article if you determine that it is not packaged in a manner that will assure safe transmission in the mails. The mailer also must tell you whether the item is fragile. When it is of a fragile nature, the mailer must describe the interior packaging.

Window Envelopes

Window envelopes that do not have a panel over the opening cannot be used for Registered Mail®. If a transparent panel is glued to the envelope, the envelope may only contain matter of non-intrinsic value. The envelope may be used for all Registered Mail® if the panel is a part of the envelope.

p. 507

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-4

Registration Numbers

Once an article is accepted as Registered Mail® at a military or civilian post office, it becomes an accountable item. That is, some person is always accountable for that item as long as it is in the postal system. To account for Registered Mail® a number is assigned to each piece. All Registered Mail® must be numbered with a preprinted, self-adhesive, bar-coded, red PS Label 200. The labels are about 1 1/2 inches high by 3 1/4 inches long. Refer to DMM for an example of Label 200.

Computing Postage and Fees

Compute the postage, fees, and other charges as soon as you have determined that the article is acceptable for mailing and after the mailer has declared the value. Weigh the article first to determine the First-Class or Priority Mail rate of postage before computing the fees. Refer to the DMM and compute the registry fee according to the declared value. Registered Mail® service may be combined with other additional services such as a return receipt or restricted delivery. Other additional services that may be combined with Registered Mail®, if the applicable standards for the services are met and the additional service fees are paid, are delivery confirmation and signature confirmation.

To figure the total, you should compute the charges in the order shown on the Receipt for Registered Mail®, PS Form 3806.

The total postage and fees are paid in postage stamps and affixed in the upper-right corner by the customer unless a postage meter tape is used.

Registered Mail® Receipt

An article is not considered as Registered Mail® until a receipt has been issued. A receipt must be issued when you have accepted the article for registration. The receipt is prepared by you and the mailer. Receipt for Registered Mail®, PS Form 3806 is used for this purpose. This form is issued in a set of two copies. The form is printed on special paper that makes a copy without the use of a carbon sheet.

Canceling Stamps and Applying Endorsement

After you have completed the receipt, collect the required amount for the postage and fee(s). If ordinary stamps are used, have the customer place the stamps in the upper-right corner of the article. Give the customer the original of the PS Form 3806 and keep the duplicate for your post office files. Apply the PS Label 200 to the address side between the return address and the postage for domestic mail and in the lower-left corner of the address side for international mail. Cancel the stamps using the APDS. Click here for an example of a properly completed PS Form 3806).

Postmarking

One of the most important reasons for registering mail is to provide security against unauthorized opening of letters or parcels. This is why you must stamp postmarks with the APDS on each sealed side of a registered article in such a way that an unauthorized opening would disturb the postmarks, thereby providing evidence that unauthorized opening has occurred. Postmarks are placed twice on letters—o n the back at the crossing of the upper and lower flaps. When a return receipt is attached to the parcel or letter, place the APDS postmark partially on the receipt and partially on the flaps of the letter. Postmark parcels in all places where the tape or flaps intersect. When parcels are sealed with

p. 508

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-5

paper tape, postmark across opposite sides of the strips. Use additional postmarks if this would make rifling more difficult.

Refunds and Recalls

The mailer may withdraw or recall Registered Mail® without charge before its delivery under the following conditions:

• By writing on the receipt, “Withdrawn before Dispatch,” and signing and surrendering the receipt

• By filing a written request for its return after dispatch at the post office where the article was mailed, giving names and addresses of mailer and addressee, the registry number, and date of mailing. The mailer must pay for faxes sent or long-distance telephone calls made to locate the article.

If re-mailed, the article must be repackaged and bare new postage and fees. Registration fees should not be refunded after the mail is accepted. Return receipt or restricted delivery fees should be refunded only when failure to furnish a return receipt or to give restricted delivery was the fault of the USPS. Receipts for fees must be submitted with requests for refunds.

REGISTERED MAIL® PROCESSING AND HANDLING

Now that we have discussed the criteria for accepting Registered Mail®, let us look at the processing and handling aspects starting with classified material sent by command official mail.

When classified material is sent through the registry system, it must be mailed in strict accordance with the Department of the Navy (DON) Information Security Program (ISP) Regulation, SECNAVINST 5510.36 (series). Let us discuss the two classifications (SECRET and CONFIDENTIAL) authorized to be transported by Registered Mail®.

Secret

SECRET is the classification level applied to information whose unauthorized disclosure could reasonably be expected to cause serious damage to the national security. Examples include information whose unauthorized release could result in disruption of foreign relations significantly affecting the national security, the disclosure of significant military plans or intelligence operations, and the disclosure of scientific or technological developments relating to national security.

The following information lists the security requirements for mailing material classified SECRET:

• USPS Registered Mail® within and between the U.S. and its territories

• USPS Registered Mail® through Army, Navy, Marine Corps, or Air Force postal service facilities, outside the area of the U.S. and its territories, provided that the material does not at any time pass out of U.S. citizen control and does not pass through a foreign postal system

• USPS and Canadian Registered Mail® with Registered Mail® return receipt between U.S. Government and Canadian Government installations in the U. S. and Canada.

Confidential

CONFIDENTIAL is the classification level applied to information whose unauthorized disclosure reasonably could be expected to damage national security. Examples include information whose unauthorized release could result in disclosure of ground, air, and Naval forces (e.g., force levels and

p. 509

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-6

force dispositions); or disclosure of performance characteristics, such as design, test, and production data of U.S. munitions and weapons systems.

The following information lists the security requirements for mailing material classified CONFIDENTIAL:

• USPS First-Class Mail between DOD (Department of Defense) activities anywhere in the U. S. and its territories. The outer wrapper or envelope shall be endorsed “Return Service Requested”

• USPS certified mail for information addressed to a cleared DOD contractor facility or non-DOD agency

• USPS Registered Mail® to and from Fleet Post Office (FPO) and Army or Air Force Post Office (APO) addresses located outside the U.S. and its territories, and when the originator is uncertain that the addressee’s location is within U.S. boundaries.

PURPOSE

From the time a piece of Registered Mail® is accepted until it is delivered to the addressee, someone is always personally responsible for its safety. The fact that classified information up to and including SECRET is authorized to be sent by official Registered Mail® is evidence of the confidence placed in Registered Mail®. Military postal personnel should always assume that official Registered Mail® contains classified material.

To provide the security required for classified material, official and personal, Registered Mail® must be dispatched only on scheduled U.S. commercial passenger nonstop flights, all-cargo aircraft, Airport Mail Center aircraft, or surface transportation, as directed. Between oversees locations Registered Mail® may also be dispatched on Navy military aircraft.

The Joint Military Postal Activities (JMPAs), in coordination with overseas commanders, designate which flights will carry Registered Mail®. The designated flights are those that arrive at the most convenient time for the receiving locations, as they must be met by assigned U.S. military personnel. Some ports overseas have no military postal facilities nearby. When in these ports, and there are no U.S. commercial, passenger nonstop flights, or all-cargo aircraft, then Registered Mail® will be dis- patched to your port of call on Airport Mail Center aircraft. You may also receive Registered Mail® on Navy aircraft scheduled in advance to provide logistics support to your port of call. You will be given sufficient advance notice of incoming Airport Mail Center aircraft or Navy military aircraft. This will allow you to meet the plane and accept delivery of mail for your ship and any other ships scheduled for the same port visit for which you have been tasked with mail receipt and dispatch responsibilities. You should be at the airport at least one hour before the scheduled arrival or departure time for unforeseen schedule changes.

Receipt System

Registered Mail® service provides a receipt to the mailer at the time of mailing. Each registered article is assigned a number for identification purposes. This number is placed on the article and the receipt at the time of mailing. A continuous chain of receipts is maintained thereafter by each person that handles the article. The person who last signs the receipt is responsible until a receipt in turn is obtained. Responsibility thus passes from one person to the next until the article is ultimately delivered to the addressee who also signs a receipt.

Registered Mail® is transported, receipted for, or processed for delivery by using the following forms:

p. 510

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-7

• PS Form 3806, Receipt for Registered Mail®

• PS Form 3849, Delivery Notice/Reminder/ Receipt

• PS Form 3854, Manifold Registry Dispatch Book

• PS Form 3877, Firm Mailing Book for Accountable Mail

• PS Form 3883, Firm Delivery Receipt for Accountable Mail and Bulk Delivery Mail

• OPNAV Form 5110/9, Mail Manifest

• DD Form 1384, Transportation Control and Movement Document.

You became familiar with the processing and receipting of Registered Mail® using PS Form 3806 earlier in this chapter. When the mailer is given the original copy of PS Form 3806, the article is then considered accepted as Registered Mail®.

When preparing articles for registration, volume mailers, such as staffs or units embarked aboard ship, must use PS Form 3877. The office responsible for preparing outgoing Official Registered Mail® completes this form. (click here for example)

In the event that there are errors noted on the form, the following procedures apply:

• Do not change the registration number on the form. Draw a line through the incorrect entry, initial it, and make the correct entry

• If there is an error in the numbers listed and received after acceptance, and the mailer has departed the post office, the error should be corrected and a notation made explaining this action.

• PS Form 3806 and PS Form 3877 are the most common methods used by Military Post Offices (MPOs) to accept Registered Mail®. The accepting office is always considered the office of origin, regardless of the return address listed on the article.

PROCESSING REGISTERED MAIL® FOR DISPATCH

The first step in the processing of outgoing Registered Mail® is separating the pieces by destination. While you are separating the pieces by destination, a quick double check should be made to make sure each piece is correctly endorsed and properly postmarked. After you have completed separating all of your Registered Mail® by destination, and have checked for proper endorsements and postmarks, you are ready to start your dispatch procedures. Personal and official Registered Mail® are dispatched in the same pouch, there is no need to prepare separate pouches. Registered Mail® addressed to APO and FPO addresses should be pouched separately and sent to the nearest Fleet Mail Center (FMC) or Navy post office.

Mail Pouches and Sacks

Registered Mail® must never be dispatched in torn or defective mailbag equipment. Mail pouches and sacks used for dispatch of Registered Mail® should be examined to ensure that such equipment is not torn or otherwise defective. Any hole renders the equipment unusable for Registered Mail®. The selection of proper mailbag equipment for the transport of Registered Mail® cannot be overemphasized. Dispatching post offices should always use plastic inserts in mailbags to protect the Registered Mail® pieces in the event of foul weather.

p. 511

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-8

Numbered Seal Pouches

Now that you have completed examining the pouch for defects, the next step in the registry dispatch process is to enclose all Registered Mail® into the pouches. You should enclose all parcels into pouches, if possible, to prevent handling as ordinary mail.

Manifold Registry Dispatch Book, PS Form 3854, prepared in duplicate, is used as an inside bill to document Registered Mail®, which is being enclosed in a pouch. Each registered article number is listed, including the tin band seal (listed in upper portion of PS Form 3854). Click here for example

Now that all the articles that will be dispatched in a numbered sealed pouch are listed on the inside bill and the bill properly completed, you are ready to place the articles in the pouch. Pouching is accomplished by doing the following:

• Tying the registered articles in bundles as listed on PS Form 3854

• Placing the original inside manifold dispatch bill under the top piece of the bundle. If there is more than one bundle, place the separate manifold dispatch bills under the top piece of each bundle. Each bundle should remain in the sequential order you used on the manifold bill. If articles cannot be tied into a bundle, put the original bill in an EP-9 (Registry Jacket Envelope) and place it inside the pouch with the articles. Click here for an example of EP-9). Retain the duplicate inside bill in the MPO files

• Closing and securing the pouch in the presence of the witness using a numbered tin band seal (USPS Item No. 817-C) Click here for an example of a numbered tin band seal...

Method of Sealing

Click here to seal an example of how to properly close and seal a registered mail sack...

Preparing the Slide Label

Pouches should be labeled to the off-load destination, unless a sufficient volume of Registered Mail® is available to make up a direct pouch. The first line of the label should indicate the destination. The second line should show the endorsement REGISTERED and the weight listed in kilograms. The third line should show the office of origin, which is the MPO preparing the pouch for dispatch. For ships, this is the ship’s name and hull number; i.e., USS THE SULLIVANS (DDG-68.) For shore installations, this is the dispatching command’s FPO number—i. e., FPO AP 96522. The slide label should be dated on the reverse side with the APDS and initialed by the registry clerk closing the pouch. Click here for an example of a Registered Mail Pouch Slide Label.

Registered Outside Pieces

Normally, registered articles dispatched from a MPO are enclosed in a pouch and secured with a numbered seal, except when impossible because of size or shape. If an article cannot be enclosed in a pouch, treat it as an outside piece.

Dispatching Mail Directly To U.S. Commercial and Military Air Carriers

You are now ready to affix the proper airport-coded tags and/or labels to each individual registered pouch or outside piece. These tags and labels provide information to the air carrier on the method for handling and routing the pouch or outside piece from the time of acceptance to arrival at the airport of final destination. You must exercise caution in the selection and preparation of these tags and labels to prevent misrouting by the air carrier. PS Tag 135-E (click here for example) should be affixed to

p. 512

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-9

each pouch, and PS Label 136-E (click here for example) should be affixed to each outside piece. When affixing PS Label 136-E, be sure not to conceal any portion of the registry number. The tags/labels should be serially numbered to identify the total number of articles dispatched to the off-load destination, for example, 1 of 6, 2 of 6, and so forth. Specific guidelines for the use and completion of airport-coded tags and labels for Registered Mail® are found in the USPS Handbook T-7 and should be followed.

The dispatching activity should also record the seal number of each pouch and the registered number of each outside piece on PS Form 3854. This is called an outside bill (click here for an example). The outside bill should be completed in triplicate, showing office of origin, as well as office of destination. In addition, the letter “O” should precede the registered number of each outside piece. The letter “S” should precede the number of each numbered seal pouch. When available, the five-digit ZIP Code should be used instead of the post office of origin. There is, however, one exception; the office of origin for all Navy mobile units must show both the ship’s name and ZIP Code.

Enclose the original and third copy of the completed PS Form 3854, together with a pre-addressed return envelope, in a USPS EP-9 registry jacket envelope. Securely attach the EP-9 envelope to the outside of the last registry pouch. If there are no pouches in the dispatch, use an EP-11 outside mail registry bill envelope (click here for example) and attach the envelope to the last piece in the dispatch.

The duplicate copy of the PS Form 3854 should be held by the dispatching activity as a suspense copy until the original is returned by the receiving activity. Upon receipt of the original signed PS Form 3854 from the receiving activity, the dispatching activity should file the original copy with the registry balance sheet that was prepared the day of dispatch. The suspense copy is then destroyed.

Dispatching Mail Directly To Military Post Offices

When Registered Mail® is dispatched directly to another military postal activity, PS Form 3854 should be prepared, in triplicate, to account for each pouch and outside piece. In addition, the following procedures apply:

• The registered number of outside pieces should be preceded by the letter “O” and the seal number of numbered seal pouches by the letter “S”

• The office of origin of each registered piece must be shown

• The Postal Clerk entrusted with delivery must sign as receiving postmaster on the triplicate bill. The total number of pieces received must be shown in the appropriate space to the left of the signature

• The original and duplicate bill should be given to the responsible Postal Clerk for delivery to the receiving postal activity

• The triplicate copy should be retained in the MPO files.

The registry clerk at the receiving postal activity postmarks and receives the mail by signing the original and duplicate bills. The original bill should be retained by the receiving activity and the duplicate bill should be given as a receipt to the delivery clerk. The delivery clerk should then file the duplicate with the registry balance sheet that was prepared for that day/tour of dispatch. The triplicate copy is then destroyed.

p. 513

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-10

PROCESSING INCOMING REGISTERED MAIL®

The handling of incoming Registered Mail® requires the same processing and care upon receipt, delivery, and forwarding, if necessary, as does outgoing Registered Mail®. The individual responsibility that has been stressed for outgoing Registered Mail® in this chapter also is true in the processing of incoming Registered Mail®.

Receipt of Registered Mail®

Immediately upon receipt, the numbered seal of each pouch and the registered number of each Outside Piece (OSP) should be verified with those listed on the appropriate documentation that accompanies the registry dispatch (PS Form 3854, DD Form 1384, or OPNAV Form 5110/9). In the event a registered dispatch is received without documentation from a U.S. commercial air carrier, the receiving activity should immediately prepare a substitute PS Form 3854 with the endorsement DUPLICATE-ORIGINAL NOT RECEIVED. At Navy post offices PS Form 3854 must be completed in duplicate. The original PS Form 3854 serves as the record of receipt. The duplicate copy should be returned to the office of the dispatching activity to complete its records.

Military postal activities receiving “tracer action” on Registered Mail® from a dispatching activity should immediately determine if the registered article was received. If received, the receiving activity should immediately contact the dispatching activity by phone, e-mail, or naval message, sign the duplicate form, and return it to the dispatching activity. If it is determined that Registered Mail® was not received at the intended destination you must follow the procedures that will be discussed in the “Irregularities in Receipt” section later in this chapter.

Hand to Hand

When receipting for Registered Mail® on PS Form 3854 from an individual, all copies of PS Form 3854 should be signed by the registry clerk to acknowledge receipt. The receiving military postal activity must keep the original copy for its records. The duplicate copy should be returned as a receipt to the individual.

At-Sea Transfer

During at-sea transfer of Registered Mail®, the receiving ship must furnish an immediate receipt to the transferring unit. If the circumstances of the transfer are of such urgent nature as to prevent the immediate return of the normal receipt, the receiving ship must acknowledge receipt by e-mail or message and will forward the paper receipt as soon as possible. According to Replenishment at Sea Instructions (NWP 4-01), Registered Mail® must be transferred in weighted, non-watertight bags whenever feasible to ensure prompt sinking in case of loss.

Irregularities in Receipt

When Registered Mail® is receipted for and it is noted that all articles listed on the manifest or inside/outside bills are not received then specific reporting action must be followed depending on the source of receipt.

For irregularities found in Registered Mail® received from sources such as at-sea highline transfer and command military aircraft, you must take the following actions:

• If all Registered Mail® listed on the dispatch bill is not received, the dispatching activity should be contacted immediately via phone, e-mail, or naval message to determine if the article was actually dispatched.

p. 514

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-11

• If the article was not sent, write NOT RECEIVED opposite the entry on the outside manifold dispatch bill (PS Form 3854) and on OPNAV Form 5110/9 or other documentation accompanying the dispatch. Mark the PS Form 3854 coupon to show the shortage and return the coupon to the dispatching activity.

• If the article was sent, but not received, then a postal offense investigation must be initiated. In addition, the dispatch bill should be noted NOT RECEIVED opposite the entry of the article not received and the bill coupon completed and returned to the dispatching activity. Retain the pouch, label, and seal until the discrepancy is explained satisfactorily or other instructions are received.

• When articles are received, but not listed on the bill, enter the article number on the bill with a note of explanation, and return the coupon from PS Form 3854 with the details of the discrepancy to the dispatching activity. Notify the dispatching activity by phone, e-mail, or naval message.

• When the outside bill is improperly prepared, make corrections on the bill and return the coupon explaining the discrepancy to the dispatching activity.

• When Registered Mail® is erroneously received, immediately contact the intended destination by phone, e-mail, or naval message and inform the originating postal activity of the articles involved and the plans for dispatch. The articles are then stamped with the APDS by placing the impression on the reverse side of the slide label for pouches and on the back portion of OSPs to indicate they were missent. You should forward missent articles to the proper destination by the next available dispatch.

Receipting For Damaged Registered Mail®

Unlike reporting irregularities for Registered Mail®, all damaged registered articles should be receipted and reported for in the same manner, regardless of the source of receipt. However, the reporting procedures are different depending on whether the damaged article is personal or official, and if depredation or compromise is suspected. Up to this point you are receipting for the damaged article and initiating required reporting procedures.

Depredation Not Suspected

When matter is found loose in a pouch, and there is only one damaged article in the pouch, then the loose matter may be assumed to relate to the damaged article. Place the loose matter in the container that is opened or damaged and rewrap the article. The bill, wrapper, and coupon should be endorsed RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION, specifying the registered number of the damaged article. The coupon portion of PS Form 3854 should be returned to the dispatching activity.

The following procedures should be followed when loose matter is found in a pouch without an envelope or container that can be related to the loose matter:

• Note all particulars on the bill and coupon

• Postmark and sign a statement explaining the circumstances and have the statement witnessed

• Return the coupon to the dispatching activity

• If unable to determine the person to whom the matter is intended or the owner, then report the facts to the servicing JMPA, who notifies the accountable postmaster’s inspector-in-charge. Hold the item until instructions are received.

p. 515

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-12

Depredation Suspected

If a damaged article is received and depredation is suspected, the Postal Officer must ensure the following:

• A postal offense investigation is initiated following the instructions provided in the DOD Postal Manual, 4525.6 (series), and OPNAVINST 5112.6 (series)

• The addressee inventories any contents of the damaged article and attempts to determine if they are intact

• The extent of the damage to the article is summarized on the inside bill and coupon

• The coupon is returned to the dispatching activity

• The damaged article is processed according to the instructions received from the investigating agency.

An initial report to Military Postal Service Agency (MPSA) should be made by naval message within 24 hours of the discovery. The MPSA, if deemed necessary, will assign a case number for reference purposes and all subsequent correspondence on the reported offense(s) must be referenced by the case number assigned by MPSA.

Receipting for Damaged Official Mail

In the event official Registered Mail® is received in damaged condition, you should endorse the inside bill and coupon RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION and return the coupon to the dispatching activity. If actual or possible compromise of classified information is apparent, then the incident should be reported according to the security procedures outlined by SECNAV Instruction 5510.36 (series), Department of the Navy (DON) Information and Personnel Security Program (PSP) Regulation.

Reporting Irregularities

When irregularities in the preparation or acceptance of a registered article are noted, the accepting post office should be advised of this fact by Registry Irregularity Report, PS Form 3826 (click here for example). The receiving post office completes this form in addition to completing the coupon of PS Form 3854.

Processing Upon Receipt

Always have a witness available when you open registry pouches. You should first check the labels of the pouches to make sure that the mail is addressed to your activity. Next, a careful examination of the pouch should be made to make certain there are no holes or ripped seams through which Registered Mail® could have been removed or lost. All registered pouches should be opened individually by performing the following steps (click here for example).

Bill Discrepancies

If the pieces received do not agree with the inside bill (PS Form 3854), the following procedures apply and must be followed:

• The dispatching office is contacted immediately by phone, E-mail, or naval message

• The appropriate JMPA is notified if the pouch originated in the U.S.

p. 516

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-13

• For articles received but not listed on the dispatch bill, you should enter the article number on the bill with a note of explanation. In addition, you should immediately contact the dispatching activity by phone, E-mail, or naval message, while also returning the annotated coupon

• Registered articles that were missent to your office are stamped with the APDS to indicate they were missent. Endorse the manifold bill and coupon to indicate which articles were missent. Return the coupon portion to the dispatching activity after you have applied your APDS. You should forward missent articles to the proper destination by the next dispatch

• When you receive a bill that is improperly prepared, you should make corrections on the bill and return the coupon explaining the discrepancy to the dispatching activity

• When a bill is missing, prepare a new bill in duplicate and return the duplicate to the dispatching activity.

Delivery of Registered Mail® To Addressee

After registered pouches have been opened, the contents verified, and backstamped, the mail is sorted by unit of address with the exception of personal Registered Mail®, which is set aside for delivery to the addressee or authorized agent.

Delivery to Mail Clerks and Mail Orderlies

PS Form 3883 is a 3-part set used to deliver a command’s official accountable mail-to-mail clerks and mail orderlies (click here for example). Before making any entries, the receiving mail clerk or mail orderly must show a validated DD Form 285 (Appointment of MPC, Unit Mail Clerk, or Mail Orderly). The mail clerk or mail orderly must verify that the registry numbers of the articles are properly listed before signing PS Form 3883. Once the verification has been made and the mail clerk or mail orderly has signed, the customer copy 3 of the form is given to the mail clerk or mail orderly and the original and copy 2 are retained for post office records.

Delivery of Registered Mail® to Addressee or Authorized Agent

Personal Registered Mail® will normally not be delivered to mail orderlies on PS Form 3883, but can be delivered to mail clerks who deliver mail from a unit mailroom. Instead, PS Form 3849 should be used to notify the addressee of Registered Mail® arrival. The form is prepared and given to the unit mail clerk or mail orderly for delivery to the addressee. PS Form 3849 (click here for example) is prepared in one copy.

Items listed below are key points to remember when delivering accountable mail:

• Positive identification is required.

• Only the addressee or an authorized agent may sign for personal accountable mail.

There are instances when the addressee is unable to come to the post office to receipt for Registered Mail®. In this case, the addressee may authorize an agent in writing, to receipt for their Registered Mail®. Military postal clerks, mail clerks, and mail orderlies are prohibited from acting as agents in this regard. The back of the PS Form 3849 has a space for the addressee to authorize an agent to sign for his or her Registered Mail®. When the back of the form is used, the addressee completes the form as follows: Step 1: Enters the name of the person who is authorized to receipt for the registered article.

p. 517

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-14

Step 1: Signs the form.

When an authorized agent presents the PS Form 3849 to the registry section, delivery is made in the same manner as when the addressee presents the form with one exception. The only difference is that the agent signs and prints their name on the form in the delivery section on the reverse side of the form.

Return Receipts

If a return receipt is attached to the registered article, the receipt will be signed and dated by the addressee or authorized agent. The receipt should be returned promptly to the source from which it was received.

Delivering Damaged Registered Articles

All damaged personal registered articles should be rewrapped and the endorsement RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION stamped on the article. The registry clerk rewrapping the article should initial and date the endorsement.

Undeliverable Registered Mail®

The two most common reasons for undeliverable Registered Mail® is that the addressee has transferred from the unit or is due to arrive. Normally, Registered Mail® received will be deliverable upon receipt. However, if a member has transferred, perform directory service on the registered article and annotate the reverse side of PS Form 3849 by checking the forward box and file it in the MPO files. Forward the registered article on the next dispatch of outgoing mail. If a registered article arrives for a person who is due to report, the holding timeframes for Registered Mail® must be adhered to.

Indication of Due to Report

When Registered Mail® is received for an individual who is not attached to the command but there is an indication that the person is due to arrive, then the following handling procedures apply:

• Complete PS Form 3849 and annotate the date on the article, then initial it. The registered article should be stored in the registry section, while the PS form is placed in the directory section for weekly screening against directory files.

• Hold undeliverable Registered Mail® no more than 15 days (30 days if requested by sender.)

• If unclaimed at that time and there is no further indication that the individual is due to arrive at a later date, then dispose of mail by placing the endorsement ATTEMPTED-NOT KNOWN on the face of the article and return the mail to the sender.

• Complete the office record portion on the reverse side of the PS Form 3849 showing the disposition of the article.

No Indication of Due to Report

If Registered Mail® is received for a person for whom there is no indication of a due-in date, yet there is reason to believe the individual may arrive since mail is being forwarded with the same last name, or some other reason, hold for 15 days. If the mail is still undeliverable at the end of the hold period, and there is no further indication that the individual is due to arrive later, the mail should be endorsed ATTEMPTED-NOT KNOWN and returned to the mailer. A PS Form 3849 is completed showing on the reverse side the disposition of the article.

p. 518

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-15

Initiating Final Notice

If Registered Mail® has not been called for after 5 days from initiating PS Form 3849, prepare a second PS Form 3849 in the same manner as the first notice. Annotate on the article the date the second notice was prepared and the date the article will be returned to sender.

Forwarding Registered Mail®

If a registered article has not been called for after five days from initiating the second notice, then a verification of the addressee’s status should be made through the receiving unit/division. The disposition of the undeliverable registered article should be made according to forwarding instructions received from the individual's unit/division, from information on the member’s directory card (OPNAV Form 5110/5), or the computerized directory file. The registry clerk should copy the new address on the face of the registered article in the lower right-hand corner, and draw a single diagonal line through the incorrect portions of the old address. Be certain not to line out the name and rate of the addressee, the registration number, the postmarks, or other pertinent information. Registered articles that are being forwarded are backstamped once with the APDS and dispatched under the original registration number and office of origin. If a return receipt is attached to the article, ensure it remains attached to the article when forwarded. The particulars of forwarding should be shown on the reverse side of the PS Form 3849. The form should be signed and dated by the registry clerk who forwards the registered article and completes the form.

Filing PS Form 3849

After the registered article is delivered to the addressee, forwarded, or returned to the mailer, the completed PS Form 3849 is retained in the post office records. These forms may be commingled in a single file with other PS Form 3849s documenting the disposition of insured and certified articles. However, a separate file may be established for registered articles if volume warrants. File the forms numerically by the last two digits of the registered number and retain for two years before destroying. Depending on volume of Registered Mail® received, it is recommended that a new file be started at the beginning of each quarter or calendar year.

CLOSING THE REGISTRY SECTION

In this chapter, you have learned how to process incoming and outgoing Registered Mail®. However, your job is not finished. The last task performed by the registry clerk before closing the registry section or before the changing of shifts is to account for all Registered Mail® processed during the business day. You show accountability of all registered items by preparing Registered Mail® Balance and Inventory, DD Form 2261.

Daily Accountability

Daily accountability involves completing a DD Form 2261 by using incoming and outgoing bills, and other forms received or prepared during the workday that shows Registered Mail® received, delivered, dispatched, and mail on hand at the close of business or shift change. When the registry clerk completes and signs the DD Form 2261, the MPO supervisor or designated individual verifies and signs the DD Form 2261 indicating it is correct.

Balance Sheet

The size and hours of operation of your MPO will determine when the balance of Registered Mail® will be conducted. For an FMC operation, this must be done at the end of each shift. A one-person

p. 519

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-16

MPO must balance the Registered Mail® at the end of each workday. DD Form 2261 (click here for example) should be used to make the appropriate entries that pertain to your volume of Registered Mail® processed during the shift or day.

When a balance cannot be attained, recheck the computations of each entry against the related forms processed during the period. Next, determine that a form is on hand for each transaction performed. If necessary, go back to the previous balance and inventory and begin a crosscheck of the numbers for each transaction since that time.

If, upon completion of a recheck, the balance and inventory still indicates a registered item is missing, you should identify the number of the missing item and source from which it was supposedly received and perform the following:

• If the mailer is served by your activity, notify that person that the article is missing and determine if the article may have been accidentally returned

• If the mailer’s response is negative, you should then contact all units or activities to which registered articles were dispatched during the reporting period. Determine if the item may have been included in a pouch, but not listed on the bill, or if the item was accepted in error

• In cases where the mailer is not served locally, you should contact the dispatching activity by phone, E-mail, or naval message.

• A letter or naval message should be sent to the accountable Postmaster or Postal Officer of the dispatching activity with instructions to notify the mailer of the possible loss. In addition, you should also request:

• The name and address of the mailer and addressee

• Information on the contents of the missing item

• Information on the classification, if the missing item was official mail

• Evidence that the addressee has or has not received the item.

If a reply is received verifying the article was received, then you should prepare PS Form 3849 and file the form with the registry records. In the event that all the actions above failed to locate the missing registered item, you should then begin to initiate a postal offense investigation as directed in the DOD Postal Manual, 4525.6M, and OPNAVINST 5112.6.

Supporting documentation for registry transactions should be maintained for two years.

Transferring Accountability

Fleet mail centers should use DD Form 2261 to transfer accountability between registry clerks upon change of shifts or any time a registry clerk surrenders custody of registered items. When only one clerk operates the registry section, it should be closed during periods of temporary absences, or if possible, temporarily transferred to another Postal Clerk. The transfer should be done by completing PS Form 3854 in two copies listing the registry pieces on hand by assigned registry numbers. The bills should be numbered consecutively, starting on 1 January of each year. The original copy should remain in the MPO files and the clerk being relieved should retain the duplicate copy. When the regular clerk returns, the procedure is repeated.

If the acceptance window is a separate operation from the registry section, accountability is transferred to the registry clerk, using PS Form 3854. Accepted registered articles need not be transferred as they are taken in through the finance section. The registered articles may be stored in

p. 520

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-17

a safe or a secured cabinet in the immediate proximity of the accepting finance clerk. Depending on the local operating schedule of the MPO’s registry section, transfer of Registered Mail® between the finance section and registry section should be made at the close of each business day or when required by the outgoing registry mail scheme for the MPO or FMC.

Registry Cage

When it is necessary for the handling and storage of large quantities of Registered Mail®, a security cage may be provided within the post office or other secure space. Postal activities that handle and store Registered Mail® should designate a secure area as the registry section. The registry section for land-based permanent structure MPOs must be built and equipped to provide the adequate security measures needed for the protection of Registered Mail®. The registry section should be separated from the rest of the work areas by a wire partition extending to the ceiling or provided with a wire top. Small land-based and shipboard MPOs may be exempt from the requirements to build a separate registry section because of the physical constraints that make it impractical or impossible. When an MPO does not have a separate registry section, precautions must be taken to ensure that Registered Mail® is kept separate from ordinary mail and protected from damage or theft.

Security of the Registry Cage

The registry cage must be properly manned or secured at all times. Unless staffed at all times, the registry section also must be equipped with a safe with a built-in three-position, dial-type combination lock for the storage of official Registered Mail®. To maintain proper security, the following policies must be complied with at all times:

• Containers used for official Registered Mail® should not be used to store postal effects or personal property

• During business hours, the container and the registry section must be secured when not in direct control of registry clerks

• After business hours and during non-duty hours, official Registered Mail® must be stored in an authorized secure container within the registry section, if possible

• Opening and closing of registry safes must be documented and a security review conducted at the close of registry business each day.

Access to Registry Work Areas

Only registry clerks on duty, witnesses, the section supervisor, and personnel authorized to inspect and audit DOD postal facilities are allowed entry to the registry section work area. The on duty registry clerk or clerks must control access to the area. A log should be kept by the shift registry clerk and anyone entering the space should be logged in and out as appropriate. Record of Entry-Registry Section, PS Form 1625, is designed for this purpose and must be used.

Combination Locks

The registry cage must be secured by a three-position, changeable combination padlock. The registry section should also have a safe with a built-in, three-position, and dial-type combination lock for the storage of official Registered Mail®. The use of a secure container that can be locked by using a General Services Administration (GSA) approved three-position, changeable combination padlock is permissible instead of a safe. This GSA-approved padlock can be procured through the Navy Supply System.

p. 521

LS: Chapter 20— Registered Mail Rev. MAR 2013 20-18

Postal facilities such as FMCs that run on a shift basis must provide each shift with a separate GSA-approved three-position, changeable combination padlock.

Recording and Storing Combinations

The combinations to the registry cage, safes, and containers should be sealed in PS Form 3977, Duplicate Key Envelope. The name of the responsible individual, the description of the contents, and the location of the applicable container should be placed on the face of the envelope. The signatures of the individual to whom the container is assigned and the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE), MPO supervisor, or other designated individual should be placed across the flap of the envelope and the envelope dated with the APDS.

p. 522

Rev. MAR 2013 21-1

CHAPTER 21

POSTAL FINANCE

As a Military Postal Clerk (MPC), one of your jobs may be that of a window clerk. About 70 percent of all window transactions involve the sale of stamps or postal stationery items. Before you can perform duties as a window clerk aboard a large ship or an overseas postal operation, you must be issued a stamp stock account. Did you ever stop to think how stamps are obtained or the purpose of the stamps? The postage stamps and meter tapes that are affixed to an article indicate that the charge for handling, transporting, delivering the article and fees for extra services (if selected by the mailer) have been prepaid. In this chapter, you learn how to order stamps from the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE) or a Postmaster. In addition, you learn how to properly account for the stamps.

Additionally, you will learn the fundamentals of the money order imprinter, postage meter machine and the Integrated Retail Terminal (IRT). As a window clerk assigned to a post office at an overseas naval activity, you may be required to operate each of these types of equipment.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

Identify and validate the forms of issue for postage stamps

Recall the different types of postal stationery available at a MPO. Recall the procedures for properly caring for postal effects. Recognize unauthorized uses of stamp stock funds. Recall the capabilities and components of the Automated Military Postal Systems (AMPS) Recall the steps in establishing and maintaining a flexible credit account. Recognize the procedures for replenishing a flexible credit account. Recognize the procedures for completing stamp requisitions. Recall procedures to follow when receiving stamp requisitions. Recall the procedures for processing damaged stamps for return to the source of supply. Recall the procedures for operating, safeguarding, and accounting for postage meters. Identify the money order form set, procedures for requisitioning blank money orders, and the security requirements for money orders.

Identify the parts of, and the security requirements for, the money order imprinter. Recognize the procedures for issuing and cashing domestic money orders Recognize the procedures for issuing and cashing domestic money orders Recall the capabilities and components of an Integrated Retail Terminal (IRT).

CHAPTER 21

p. 523

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-2

POSTAGE STAMPS AND STAMPED PAPER

Postage stamps and stamped paper are often referred to as stamp stock. In this next section, we will discuss the validity of stamps, forms of issue, types of postal stationery, and the care and protection required for stamp stock and postal monies.

Validity of Stamps

Any uncancelled postage stamps issued by the United States since 1860 may be used for postage. All valid United States postage stamps are good for postage from any point in the United States or from any other place where the United States domestic mail service operates. The following stamps may not be used for postage:

• Mutilated or defaced stamps

• Stamps cut from stamped envelopes, aerogrammes, or stamped cards

• Stamps covered or coated in such a manner that the canceling or defacing marks cannot be imprinted directly on the stamps

• Non-postage stamps (migratory-bird hunting and conservation stamps, U.S. savings and thrift stamps, and so forth)

• Postage due, special delivery, special handling, and certified mail stamps

• United Nations stamps unless on mail deposited at the United Nations, NY

• Stamps of other countries

• Stamps on which any unauthorized design, Naval message, or other marking has been overprinted.

• Stamps listed by USPS as removed from sale or obsolete should not be available for purchase by patrons. These stamps should be retained by the COPE and prepared for return, when directed.

Matter bearing imitations of postage stamps, in adhesive or printed form, or private seals or stickers that are similar to a postage stamp in design, should not be accepted for mailing. However, seals or stickers that do not imitate postage stamps may be attached to other than the address side of mail (Figure 21-1).

p. 524

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-3

Figure 21-1 — An example of an imitation or private seal.

Forms of Issue

Single

Single stamps are separated from a sheet of stamps and can be sold in any number up to a full sheet.

Sheets

The number of stamps to a sheet varies, depending upon the size of the stamps. Sheets of ordinary postage stamps and postage-due stamps consist of 100 stamps per sheet. Stamps such as commemorative stamps and certain other various denominations usually consist of 20 or 50 stamps per sheet or other amounts per sheet as announced in the Postal Bulletin.

Books

Books of stamps are sold for protection and convenience. The stamps are self-adhesive and are protected to prevent the stamps from sticking together.

Coils

Stamps are issued in coils for use by customers who find this method more convenient to use than loose stamps, sheets, or books of stamps. Postage at the First-Class letter rate, stamped card rate, and ordinary postage in several of the lower denominations are available in coils. Stock only those denominations in coils that your customers request. Also, never open coils because they must be sold intact for the total stamp value.

Kinds of Stamps

The Postal Operations Manual (POM) divides postal adhesive-backed stamps into four basic types, according to the purpose for which they are intended. The types are as follows:

• Regular (Definitive) stamps

p. 525

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-4

• Commemorative stamps

• Special stamps

• Forever stamps.

Some information on each of these types of stamps appears below, including the purpose and forms of issue.

Regular Stamps

The largest quantity of stamps in your retail account will be in regular stamps. You will not need all the different denominations available and should only stock those denominations that fit the needs of your postal customers. Regular stamps may be used to pay for registration, certified mail, insurance fees and special handling. In fact, they may be used for any mailing charge.

Commemorative Stamps

Commemorative stamps are issued in observance of historical events, to honor noted persons, and to emphasize topics of national importance or interest. Each issue is printed in limited quantities to be sold for a limited period. Commemorative stamps do not replace regular stamps but are sold upon request, when available.

New commemorative stamp issues are announced by notices in the Postal Bulletin. These notices should be displayed in post office lobbies for customers to see. Each Military Post Office (MPO) should have commemoratives on-hand.

Special Stamps

Special stamps supplement each year’s regular issue. They include the Love and Holiday stamps. Each year the U.S. Postal Service (USPS) announces by notices in the Postal Bulletin the availability and sale dates of holiday stamps. MPOs should order these stamps early.

Forever Stamps

Forever Stamps are only used for 1-ounce letters regardless of when the stamps were purchased no matter how many times postage rates may increase in the future. All unsold Forever Stamp booklets will be revalued whenever postal rates increase.

POSTAL STATIONERY

Stamped cards and stamped envelopes are examples of postal stationery. Each of these items may be issued to you as part of your stamp stock account. Remember that prices on postal stationery are subject to change, and you should keep yourself informed as to the current selling price of stamped cards and stamped envelopes. The Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) and Postal Bulletins are references for this information.

Stamped Cards

The USPS supplies stamped cards with a postage stamp printed or impressed on it for the purpose of transmitting a message. The USPS sells two stamped cards; one is a double stamped card with one half of the card being a reply card, the other is a single card. Your MPO will normally only stock single-piece rate stamped cards. Single and double reply-paid cards are available at the First-Class postage rate plus a charge for the card. Refer to the DMM for the current prices for stamped cards.

p. 526

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-5

Stamped Envelopes

Stamped envelopes are made of high-grade paper that will withstand any ordinary handling to which a letter may be subjected. Stamped envelopes are available in plain or personalized format with four different types each. Under normal conditions your MPO will supply only plain stamped envelopes.

Regular plain stamped envelopes are available at the First-Class postage rate plus a charge for the envelope. Two sizes are available, size No. 6-3/4 and size No. 10. Single stamped envelopes, in either size, are sold at the same price; refer to the DMM for the current price.

CARE AND PROTECTION OF STOCK AND FUNDS

Stamps, postal stationery, and other accountable items must be protected at all times. At the finance window, keep your funds and stock stored in a cash drawer that will accommodate the different denominations of coins, bills, and the postage stock items of the highest demand.

Cash drawers are designed to keep postal stock beyond the reach and sight of the customers. For security reasons you must always lock your cash drawer during temporary absences from the window. At night and when the post office is closed, place all funds and stamp stock account in your assigned safe.

Duplicate combinations and keys to cashboxes, cash drawers, or safes in which funds and postal stock are stored, should be sealed in Duplicate Key Inventory (Envelope), PS Form 3977s (Figure 21-2). They must be safeguarded by the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE) (unless you are the COPE then by another designated individual). PS Form 3977s should be receipted for on a modified Key Receipt, PS Form 1096 (Figure 21-3).

p. 527

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-6

Figure 21-2 — An example of a Duplicate Key Inventory (Envelope), PS Form 3977.

Place your name, the description of the contents, and the location of the applicable container on the face of the envelope(s). In addition, your signature and the signature of the designated individual should be placed across the flap of the envelope and the envelope dated with the All Purpose Date Stamp (APDS).

Each clerk should be assigned a separate cashbox or safe when in custody of any portion of the command’s assigned credit.

MPCs having custody of funds and stamp stock can be held liable for their loss when they do not comply with handling and storing instructions. NEVER allow another Postal Clerk (junior or senior) to sell or make window transactions from your cash drawer.

Combinations to safes used to store funds and stock should be changed:

• Upon initial receipt of the safe

• Whenever there is a compromise of the combination

• Whenever an individual who has had custody of the combination is transferred or relieved of credit

p. 528

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-7

• Annually.

Figure 21-3 — An example of a modified Key Receipt, PS Form 1096.

Arrangement of Stock

Any workable arrangement of stamp stock, consistent with security and protection standards, is permissible. The following procedures may prove helpful to you in arranging your stamp stock.

• For convenience keep the stamps in a large scrapbook, the pages of which are slightly larger than the sheets of stamps. Place individual denominations between the pages in numerical order, or in order of the most frequently sold stamps. Tab the pages with each denomination

• Keep stamps flat. Use a book, a piece of cardboard or flat metal, or any other heavy object to keep the stamps from buckling and curling. In humid climates and during the summer, it may be helpful to place sheets of waxed paper between the sheets of stamps to prevent them from sticking together.

Your account container will have compartments for coins and bills. Place the coins in the front compartment where they will be accessible to you for making change. Place the bills in the large compartments. If space is available, keep your books of stamps (if held) in the account container also. Keep your envelopes and stamped cards in a large compartment near your stamp window. Never open more than one box of a kind at a time; when your stock is audited, unopened boxes are much easier to count.

You will conduct retail operations over a counter or through a window, depending upon the size and layout of your post office.

Selling Postage

Postal counter work is one of the most important tasks you will perform. This type of duty is essentially one of public contact, and it requires businesslike behavior and service that is COURTEOUS and EFFICIENT. A thorough knowledge of postal regulations concerning the types of postal services offered and the appropriate postage rates is necessary.

p. 529

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-8

Always remember to collect the money before handing out the stamps. You should keep the money handed to you in sight until the transaction has been completed. This will avoid any confusion or disagreement between you and the customer about the amount you were given. After you have made change, count it out to the customer. This will serve to double-check your computation. You should complete all necessary postal financial transactions in the presence of the customer.

When you are selling stamps, especially those for use on a parcel, always use those of the highest suitable denomination. For example, do not use eight $.25 stamps when two $1 stamps would suffice. Do not damage or soil your stamp stock. Sell your older stock first to minimize spoilage.

Affixing Stamps

MPCs are not permitted to affix stamps to mail. The mailer of the article must affix the stamps and should be so informed should the question arise. Inform your patrons, when necessary, that the stamps must be affixed firmly in the upper-right corner of the address side of the article. Any stamp partially concealed by an overlapping stamp may not be counted as postage.

UNAUTHORIZED TRANSACTIONS

It is unlawful for those of you entrusted with the sale or custody of postage stamps to use the stamps in payment of debts or expenses or for the purchase of any salable articles. Stamps must be sold for face value only.

Your personal funds and property must not be stored in any container(s) assigned for the safeguarding of postal effects. In fact, postal clerks are not authorized to store any personal items in an MPO, and must not accept deposits of money or other articles for safekeeping from anyone.

AUTOMATED MILITARY POSTAL SYSTEM (AMPS)

The Automated Military Postal System connects MPOs and other Military Postal activities around the world directly to the Military Postal Service Agency (MPSA) in Alexandria, VA via the World Wide Web. Instead of relying on telephone messages, e-mails, or other secondhand communication methods, AMPS users can view the information about their MPOs on their own desktops. When changes or corrections must be made, users can update the information themselves.

In addition to automating the processing of MPO information, AMPS presents its users with finance and transportation information managed by the United States Postal Service (USPS) and other agencies. This data is loaded automatically into the AMPS database on a periodic basis and, once loaded, becomes available immediately to users. AMPS also permits users to download this data from the Website to their personal computers.

FLEXIBLE CREDIT

Stamps and postal stationery are issued by the Stamp Distribution Office (SDC) in Phoenix, AZ and Binghamton, New York.

The total amount of flexible credit carried by a MPO should be based on a 9-week stock level. For example, if the average weekly sale totals 5 stamps, then the 9-week stock level should not exceed 45 stamps (9 weeks x 5 = 45) for that item number. When calculating the stamp stock limits, each item is calculated separately, and the total value of all item numbers is added together to determine the total accountability of a main stock.

p. 530

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-9

The flexible accounting system provides more latitude in stamp requisitioning because funds are not submitted with requisitions to obtain stamps and stamped paper. This system reduces the Postal Finance Officers (PFOs) and COPEs/Finance Supervisors accountability for stamps and stamped paper, based on stamp sales remittances, and increases their accountability upon receipt of stamp requisitions.

Establishing Original Stamp Stock

The procedures for requesting establishment of a MPO are contained in DOD Postal Manual and OPNAV 5112.6 (series) . These procedures include establishing your original flexible credit.

As a general guide for establishing a COPE account issued by an accountable postmaster, calculate a minimum of $25 per sponsor served plus 50 percent. Initial establishment of a COPE account extended from an accountable postmaster must be routed through the Major Command for approval of credit limit.

The amount of the original stamp stock desired by the Commanding Officer is specified in the letter that requested the Navy post office to be established. This amount should be increased or decreased based on your 9-week stock level. For example, an aircraft carrier would carry an approximate total flexible credit of $10,000. This amount is subject to fluctuate possibly being lower in homeport and higher on long deployments.

Receipt of Original Stamp Stock

When a Navy post office is established, the designated COPE will receive the initial stamp requisition. This requisition must be opened and verified in the presence of a witness. Both the COPE and a witness must verify that the contents and invoice of a Stamp Requisition, PS Form 17 agree. After the verification has been completed, the COPE and witness must sign and date the invoice. The COPE retains the invoice in the MPO files for record purposes and reports the amount of stamp stock received via online Daily Financial Report, PS Form 1412, and submits via AMPS.

Other actions that have to be completed when establishing a new post office are as follows:

• Confirm receipt of blank money order forms

• Prepare Money Order Control Record, DD Form 885 for the blank money order forms

• Prepare the post office Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)

• Implement directory card files and mail orderly appointments (to include training of mail orderlies.)

Custody of Flexible Credit

Remember a safe to secure the credit assigned to you must be obtained before you receive the stock. Also, remember that you will be the sole custodian of the postal effects issued to you, and you are solely responsible for their safekeeping at all times.

Change in Custody

Whenever there is a change of COPE or when a window clerk is relieved of an account, an audit must be held on the account. Overages are collected and remitted via AMPS. Restitution for shortages must be made at the time of the audit.

p. 531

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-10

REPLENISHMENT

For replenishment purposes, the amount of flexible credit of your Navy MPO is divided into two groups:

• The PORTION of the individual flexible credit in your custody and in the custody of each window clerk

• The TOTAL of the flexible credit of your MPO.

Stamp stock for each of these two groups is replenished as described below.

Individual Flexible Credit

Clerks remitting the requisition must submit PS Form 17 in duplicate to the COPE. When hand-carrying requisitions, complete them in duplicate, the COPE must retain the original and the clerk must retain the copy. A witness is not required to sign the PS Form 17 if the requisition is filled when the receiving clerk is physically present. The cash portion should not exceed 1 percent of the total accountability or $100, whichever is smaller of their flexible credit.

Activity Flexible Credit

Replenishment of stamps for the unit‘s main stamp stock should be conducted using the calculation for the 9 week stock level. Determine the proper stock level for each item in the COPE’s main stamp stock not the dollar value.

Replenishing Guidelines

Experience will soon teach you, the COPE, which stamps are in heavy demand. MPOs in deployed ships and at overseas activities normally use higher value stamps than those ships that are in their homeports. In addition, you should consider the increased mailing before holidays, particularly Mother’s Day, Father’s Day, Easter, Christmas, and Valentine’s Day. Anticipate your needs, and always keep a supply of the best sellers and commemoratives on hand.

Your first step in ordering is to determine the stamps that are in high demand, and then determine which denominations are in lowest supply.

When you determine the quantities to be ordered, remember that most of the stamps you handle are issued in sheets of 20, 50, or 100. In all cases adjust the amount of the requisition, whenever possible, to permit ordering stamps in at least full sheets. When requisitioning stamps, refer to the DMM or the Postal Bulletin for proper denominations and quantity.

STAMP REQUISITIONS

Requisitions are prepared and submitted on PS Form 17 to the accountable postmaster SDC via fax, email or first class mail (Figure 21-5). If sent first class mail it must be submitted in an original and three copies.

p. 532

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-11

Figure 21-4 — An example of a Stamp Requisition, PS Form 17.

Steps for completing PS Form 17

Block 1: The requisition number (beginning at the fiscal year [Oct 1]), the check number and the amount of the check

Block 2: Your command’s complete mailing address

Block 3: An impression of the APDS. The APDS must NOT be photocopied.

p. 533

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-12

Block 4: The COPE or other submitter’s signature. Do NOT photocopy signature. To verify the requisition, the reserve custodian initials here. Block 5: L eft blank unless returning stamps Block 6: L eft blank unless returning stamps Block 7: Check appropriate block.

NOTE

If returning damaged or old stock and ordering new stamps, you should use two separate requisitions.

Block 8: Information concerning the stamps you are ordering or returning in the appropriate columns

Block 9: This block is left blank unless returning stamps

Block 10: The total amount of stamps ordered

Block 11: Signature of the reserve custodian and the date when the stamp requisition was received

Block 12: Signature of the COPE and the date when the stamp requisition was received.

Submit regular requisitions once a month. Retain a copy of the PS Form 17 in the COPE files, pending receipt of the filled requisition. Do not submit funds for stock requisitioned.

Upon receipt of the filled requisitions, verify, with a witness, the quantity of stock received and record the value of the stamps and stamped paper received in U-III. If a subsequent shortage is discovered (such as a book of stamps missing upon opening a sealed container), or an error in the remittance is made, immediately bring it to the attention of the originator of the requisition and resolve it via letter. Do not make an adjustment on PS Form 1412, as the letter explaining the discrepancy will suffice for audit purposes.

RECEIPT OF STOCK

The SDC will return the requisitions via Registered Mail™. The COPE will sign for the incoming requisition on a Firm Delivery Receipt, PS Form 3883. The COPE and a witness must open the requisition. Care must be taken that postage stock is not discarded with the wrappings. After the COPE has received all the items they compare the amount listed on the duplicate copy of PS Form 17 with the retained copy of the requisition in the post office files, and makes required changes, if any. If found to be correct, the COPE signs and dates Block 11 and the witness signs and dates Block 12.

After verification and completion of the above entries on the duplicate PS Form 17, file in the MPO files for 4 years. If a discrepancy is found when the shipment is received, report the facts immediately to your Postal Officer and Commanding Officer. In the event of a shortage in the shipment, notify the source of supply by letter stating the circumstances. The letter should include the name of the person who signed for the requisition, and the name of the person who witnessed the opening of the requisition. A copy of the PS Form 17 must be included as an enclosure. A copy of the letter report should be filed in the post office, and the amount of the discrepancy should be carried as “in transit”

p. 534

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-13

pending adjustment. The wrapper of the package, or the shipping case, if envelopes are involved, must be carefully preserved until the matter is adjusted. The Commanding Officer will notify the MPSA by Naval message of the circumstances.

If an overage is found, you will report the facts in the same manner as a shortage. Only after the incoming stamp requisition has been audited twice and double-checked will you return the overage of stamp stock with a photocopy of the original PS Form 17 and letter of explanation of the circumstances.

RETURNING DAMAGED AND OBSOLETE STAMP STOCK

Always ensure, before delivering stamps to customers that they are free from damage. If stamps become damaged while in the customer’s possession, they can be exchanged by the customer; however, the exchange is always made in stamps, NEVER IN CASH. The exchange will be an equal value of stamps of the same denomination. Stamps presented for exchange must be in substantially whole condition with the denomination evident.

Occasionally you will receive damaged stamps in a stamp requisition. Sometimes a clerk will damage stamps while separating a sheet, or when tearing a stamp from the sheet. Return all damaged stock to the source of supply for exchange (COPE, SDC.)

Prepare PS Form 17 in duplicate to return stock because of damage. Prepare the form exactly as if you were making a regular requisition, except mark the Return stock box number 4. When mailing damaged stock, a witness must verify all entries and it must be sent to the Stamp Destruction Office as designated by USPS.

West Coast commands returning stamp stock submit to the SDC office in Phoenix:

PHOENIX STAMP DISTRIBUTION CENTER ATTN: DESTRUCTION VAULT 1441 BUCKEYE RD PHOENIX AZ 85034-9109 Email: [email protected]

Tel: (602) 223-3511

East Coast commands returning stamp stock submit to the SDC office in Atlanta: ATLANTA STAMP DISTRIBUTION CENTER ATTN: DESTRUCTION VAULT

125 VILLANOVA DRIVE ATLANTA GA 30336-2521 Email: [email protected]

Tel: (404) 344-1503

When damaged stamp stock is returned, record the amount on PS Form 1412 in AMPS.

p. 535

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-14

POSTAGE METERS

If you are assigned to a small command such as a LHA, DDG, FFG or large shore activity overseas, your duties as a finance clerk may require you to operate a postage meter machine. Postage meters are furnished by the USPS to military post offices to provide a means of selling postage without the use of postage stamps .The postage meter consists of three parts, the postage meter, keyboard and scale.

MONEY ORDER FORMS

If you are assigned to a large command such as an aircraft carrier or an overseas location, your duties may require you to sell and cash money orders.

The Money Order Set

A money order form set consists of three parts the money order (MO), voucher and the customer receipt and, each having a specific purpose. (Figure 21-5.)

Figure 21-5 — An example of a postal money order form set.

Item 1: The top copy is the money order negotiable document.

Item 2: The Voucher. You will retain this portion to prepare your money order report, which we will discuss later in this chapter.

Item 3: The Customer Receipt. The customer receipt serves as proof of purchase in case of loss or theft of the money order.

Item 4: The two carbons are removed along with the voucher before the money order and money order receipt are issued to the customer.

The Serial Number

Each money order set is assigned an 11-digit number. This number is preprinted in the top left part of the money order set. The first 10 numbers are the serial number used to identify the money order.

p. 536

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-15

The 11th digit is used as a check sum number and is NOT part of the actual serial number. The serial number is read by a computer; therefore, the numbers must never be smudged. You should never handle the top third portion of the money order form set.

Completing the Money Order and Receipt

The purchaser completes the money order and customer’s receipt as follows:

• Pay To block— The purchaser of the money order enters the name and address of the person or firm to which the money order is to be paid. The purchaser should enter this information immediately after purchase. A money order that is not completed is the same as a negotiable instrument. It is like cash in the hands of whoever has it

• From block— The person buying a money order places their name and address in this space

• Memo block— The purchaser of the money order can indicate for what purpose the money order is to be used. If paying a bill or paying for merchandise ordered, the account number or the type of merchandise ordered may be entered in this space

• Clerk block—The initials of the clerk that cashes the money order.

Requisitioning Blank Money Order Forms

Blank money order forms should be ordered as needed. If your post office is aboard ship, you must consider several possible scenarios when you place an order. If your ship is on or will be on an extended deployment, you will issue more money orders than if you were in your homeport. Some of the things you should consider are the following:

• What is the ship’s operating schedule

• If a deployment is scheduled, how long will the ship be away from homeport

• If a deployment is scheduled, will there be an increase in personnel

• What was the number of money orders sold during the last deployment

• What is the amount of available storage space on board?

Requisitioning Frequency

Because of operating schedules, ships must maintain at least a 5-month supply of blank money order forms at all times and shore activities must maintain at least a 3-month supply. All MPOs are restricted to a maximum of a 12-month supply of forms. Once you have determined the number of blank money order forms you will need, you are ready to submit your order. The order must be submitted at least 45 days before the forms are needed. Always monitor blank money order form levels.

Requisitioning Forms (Normal Requisitions)

Blank money order forms are requisitioned by completing PS Form 17, in triplicate at least 45 days before the minimum supply level is reached. Prepare PS Form 17 (Figure 21-6) as follows: Block 1: Enter the requisition number. Requisitions ar e numbered consecutively beginning with the number 01-YY on 01 October each fiscal year.

Block 2: Enter the name, address, telephone number, email and finance number of the unit. Block 3: Postmark with the APDS.

p. 537

LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance Rev. MAR 2013 21-16

Block 4: Clerk submitting requisition signs here.

Block 5: Enter the amount of money orders requested.

Fax or email requisition form to the USPS Material Distribution Center, Topeka, KS, keeping a suspense copy in the MPO files until requisition has been received.

NOTE

Even though the same form is used to order stamps and money orders, money order requisition numbers should be kept separate from stamp requisition numbers.

p. 538

Rev. MAR 2013 21-17

ii}f1 VNfTEDSTIIT£S 0 0 CD - "" LS: Chapter 21-Postal Finance

POST&SCRI/IC£e STAJ. P REOUISJTION #

Po tmark fi•,nt• U:o.. u••to Nan-. of PG$1 Off (:•,Slo1t io11 (II 811 aud• G) G) G) Te•tliiOI,.Ho. ZIPC<Kl& G) G) G) CD Dote Slid Or- Si!l"""..011 SuDmil1• Prepare an ORIGtiAL and OHE COPY of tllos form. S..bmrt only the ORIGINAL Kl>ep tiM! COPY for your tec-ord PAINT all onlormatiDtl except sognatuo Tpong rs not nee sary Orders cannDI be proe sed SVlll..011 Sllitll* """hout Ft tNANCe NO (anod UNIT 0 .where applicable) ent11 on'ot I"' per kit USe a second IOrm • nttnnl)' ADD UP tht V;llue t'*'mn nd anter the toll on the To11 Vt1.11 Orckr bo• DATe STAMP the upJI'!r rii#lt tamar on tiM! day •tot!< •• ordar..J SV>ill..e 011 W111oe • Note Whan •n 1tem IS out ol &toell;. •'im1larem of tiM! same denom1natJon,ava1loble. will be &ub51ituted unl.,s yoo 11d1cat e otl>e Vme by placirog an 'X' 1n the Do Not S4Jbstrt1Jte Block

Tw•<JI AO<i>.lilllon r xbeduled Or<kf r Clerk Order r Emergency Order r Rttum Stock

HoStJit ltemtfo.. OU.'Iit)' Denou..l.llllou V-*• OU<:lrl -

r--=-f0 t'-:;:.".-"'

-

-

I""" 1.- .... Jr'll

5'"\ :/

A H,_, I I '-A'-A I '-'

-

-

- -

-

Rell"'l)' Nllmb& Vsed Tot•l V•lue Ordered S9>0fure 01 P<ncn R«>eeWWg stock

-01->>

PS Foun 17,PAay Z007

Figure 21-6- An example of a PS Form 17 used to requisition money orders.

p. 539

Rev. MAR 2013 21-18 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Receipt of Money Order Forms

Each shipment of blank money order forms ordered from the SDC is sent by Registered Mail™ and should be delivered unopened to the money order custodian. The person receiving the shipment should sign a delivery receipt PS Form 3883 before verifying that the shipment is correct as ordered.

Verification of Money Orders

Each shipment of blank money order forms received should be opened and the contents verified as soon as possible after receipt by the COPE and a witness.

The serial number of the top money order form of each package is visible through the cutout in the chipboard on the top of each sealed package. Remember, each package contains 100 blank money order forms.

It must be assumed that each sealed package contains 100 forms. Sealed packages should not be opened for the purpose of verification. Do not open the sealed packages until you are ready to use the money order forms.

Missing or Damaged Shipments

When a shipment of blank money orders is excessively late or is received in a damaged state, the appropriate Accountable Paper Depository should be notified. Treat MO’s received in defective or mutilated condition as spoiled. If large shipments of damaged MO forms are received, request disposition instructions from the Accountable Paper Depository. If necessary, immediately reorder blank money order forms.

Money Order Invoice

Each shipment of blank money order forms is accompanied by a PS Form 17 that serves as the invoice. The PS Form 17 is enclosed in the shipment and lists the inclusive serial numbers of all money orders sent.

After each sealed package of money order forms has been verified, the reserve custodian will sign the PS Form 17 (bottom right) as the person receiving the money orders and the COPE will sign as the witness.

File the signed PS Form 17 that accompanied the money orders in the post office file. Code for destruction 4 years after last money order series has been issued.

Clerks operating under the Flexible credit system are authorized to hold money orders overnight and are not required to turn them back over to the COPE on a daily basis.

Accounting for Money Order Forms

Once a shipment of blank money order forms has been received, a record of them must be made. The reserve custodian and COPE must know at any time the status of all blank money order forms. This is done by using Money Order Control Record, DD Form 885. A separate DD Form 885 is used for each different series of money orders. If properly completed and maintained, DD Form 885 will provide the reserve custodian and the COPE with the following information:

• The inclusive serial numbers of each money order series

• The inclusive serial numbers, number of money orders issued and returned, and date of issue to the Postal Clerk(s) or date of return to the reserve custodian

p. 540

Rev. MAR 2013 21-19 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

• The inclusive serial numbers of money orders currently held by the Postal Clerk(s)

• The inclusive serial numbers and number of money orders remaining in each series.

Money Order Control Record DD Form 885 is completed (Figure 21-7) and maintained by the COPE. To complete DD Form 885: Block 1: Enter your office FPO address.

Block 2: Enter the source from which the blank money order forms were received. Block 3: Enter the first and last serial numbers of the money order series. Block 4: Enter the total number of forms received in the shipment. Block 5: Enter the date the shipment of forms was received. Block 6: Enter the registered number(s) under which the shipment of forms was received. Block 7: Obtain the signature of the COPE.

Figure 21-7 — An example of a Money Order Control Record, DD Form 885.

Finance clerks should also maintain DD Form 885 in their safe folder indicating transfers of custody of money order forms with COPE, or another postal clerk.

Safeguarding DD Form 885

The DD Form 885 records the history of money orders that were in your possession or transferred from you to another clerk. This is probably the most important routine document that you will keep. Safeguard your DD Form 885 in your safe and make sure that you are the only one that records information on it.

p. 541

Rev. MAR 2013 21-20 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Money Orders Held By Postal Clerk

Money order forms with the lowest serial numbers should be issued first. Newly received money order forms should not be issued until the stock of old forms has been used. You should request money order forms in blocks of 100. If you receive forms in less than blocks of 100, then you and the custodian must verify each money order by serial number.

Do not open a sealed package (100) of money order forms until you are ready to use them. Each time you open a sealed package of blank money order forms, you must verify each form by serial number before you issue them. Finance clerks are authorized to hold money orders overnight and are not required to turn them back over to the COPE on a daily basis.

Safeguarding Money Order Forms

Blank money order forms are valuable and must be kept locked up when not in use. When money order business is being conducted, blank money order forms should be kept out of reach of postal customers. Reserve stocks of money order forms in the custody of the designated custodian or a postal clerk must be kept in one of the following places to which the accountable person has sole access:

• A vault

• A three-position combination safe • Another container offering comparable security of a vault or three-position combination safe. If you are a money order clerk, you must have a metal cashbox, drawer, or safe equipped with a suitable locking device. Blank money order forms must be stowed in one of these containers when you are not transacting money order business. To establish individual responsibility, combinations or keys must not be available to other persons. If your stowage container is a locked box or drawer, it should be secured in a safe during temporary absences or during nonbusiness hours. Develop good security habits when you start working in a post office. They will be important to you as you advance in rate and take charge of a large post office. Unless you have written permission to do otherwise, return all unused blank money order forms to the custodian for safekeeping at the close of business each day.

Care in Handling Money Order Forms

Money order forms are processed by machine. Therefore, they should not be folded, creased, smudged, or otherwise mutilated. They should not be stored in damp or other unsuitable areas. The serial number on each money order set is machine-readable and must not be smudged. You should never handle the upper-third portion of the money order set. When you open a new package of money order forms, you should keep the remaining forms under pressure. A great deal of pressure is not needed; just enough to keep the forms flat is all that is required.

MONEY ORDER EQUIPMENT

In addition to the money order form set, you will use a money order imprinter while issuing money orders. The money order imprinter serves an important function in the money order process. The settings and its use are explained below.

p. 542

Rev. MAR 2013 21-21 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Money Order Imprinter

The money order imprinter is simple to operate. It is quick, efficient and designed to save time and effort at the finance window. The money order imprinter you will be using is provided to MPOs by the USPS and is considered accountable equipment under custody of the COPE.

Money Order Imprinter Operating Instructions

Operation of the money order imprinter is broken down into five easy steps. See (Figure 21-8) while reading the steps listed below.

Figure 21-8 — An example of a money order imprinter. Step 1: Setting the date:

1. From left to right align the date fingertip key tabs to the face plate numerals as follows:

• YEAR: The light gray key tab should be aligned to the proper decade digit, the dark grey key tab to the year digit.

• MONTH: The light gray key tab should be aligned to the proper ten digit of the month, the dark gray key tab, to the unit digit.

• DAY: The light gray key tab should be set to the proper ten digits, and the dark gray key tab, to the unit digit of the day.

p. 543

Rev. MAR 2013 21-22 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

NOTE

The repeated digit in all of the 10 columns of the date section are to assure long character life in these frequently used digit columns.

2. Always ensure that the correct date is set on the imprinter before beginning the business day.

Step 2: Setting the dollar amount:

1. Align the DOLLAR and CENT keys to the proper digits on the faceplate for the desired money order amount.

2. Verify the desired amount in the verification windows of the imprinter before inserting a blank money order form set.

NOTE

The $1,000.00 and $100.00 columns have been fitted with stops (red plastic strips) to help prevent amounts from being printed over the current postal service limits. These stops can be adjusted for future limit changes.

Step 3: Aligning the money order form set:

1. Place the money order form set face up into the alignment tray of the imprinter (perforated tab/stub to the left).

The red guideline should appear on the tray base to the left of the money order set stub when the form is in the proper location.

NOTE

To avoid serious damage to the imprinter, never actuate the operating lever without a form set inserted into the imprinter. Ensure that the operating lever is in its full resting position before attempting to change position of any of the date or dollar amount keys.

Step 4: Operating lever imprint stroke:

p. 544

Rev. MAR 2013 21-23 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

1. Grasp the grip handle of the operating lever assembly with your right hand and pull the lever all the way forward and down until it reaches the bottom of its stroke (listen for the “popping” sound).

NOTE

To assure a quality imprint, a built-in ratchet mechanism will not allow the operating lever to be returned to its rest position until a complete lever stroke has been made.

2. Hold onto the handle and allow it to return to its full rest position. Remove the form set from the imprinter and return all DOLLAR and CENT keys to their safe (no value) positions.

Step 5: Checking the imprint of the money order:

1. After imprinting the money order, check the imprint to assure that the correct value and date were struck. In addition, check to make sure that there is no overstrike of the imprint onto the money order serial number.

2. Remove the money order voucher (white portion), and the carbons from the set.

You must retain all vouchers and carbons to complete your money order business report at the end of the day. Maintain the vouchers in serial number sequence throughout the day.

You must maintain serial number continuity; always use the form with the lowest serial number first. If you issue a money order out of serial number sequence, DO NOT recall or spoil it; rather, return to the proper sequence as soon as possible.

Security of Money Order Imprinter

The money order imprinter must be kept secured at all times (out of the reach of customers) because it can be used to print negotiable instruments. The money order imprinter is considered accountable equipment and its loss will be reported as a postal offense.

ISSUING MONEY ORDERS

The domestic money order with which you have become familiar is sold at all U.S. civilian and most MPOs. Refer to DMM for the maximum amount for which a domestic money order can be issued. All money orders must be issued on the money order imprinter. Under no circumstances should money orders be handwritten or typed.

Money Order Fees

A fee is charged for each money order issued. If you issued three money orders to the same customer, you would have to collect three fees. Refer to the DMM concerning fees for issuing a money order from an MPO. The fee for a money order issued by a civilian post office is more than from a MPO.

p. 545

Rev. MAR 2013 21-24 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Issuing Procedures

Now that you are familiar with the money order form set and the money order imprinter, we will go through the steps in preparing for and actually issuing the money order. The following is generally the procedure from start to finish:

1. Obtain the blank money order forms from the COPE. You should get a sufficient number of forms necessary to conduct business for that day.

2. If the money orders are loose (less than a sealed package of 100), verify each money order by serial number. As each package is opened, each money order serial number must be verified before issuing from that package.

3. Get your imprinter from its storage place and test to see that it is operable.

4. Set the correct date.

5. Check the print handle. Ensure the handle is in the up position.

6. Greet the customer.

7. Check the customer’s identification to determine eligibility for service.

8. Verify the dollar amount of the money order desired by repeating the amount back to the customer.

9. Set the amount requested on the amount keys.

10. Insert the blank money order set so that it lies flat within the guides of the imprinter. Do NOT touch the upper-third portion of the money order form set.

11. Now move the print handle all the way down until you hear the popping sound, then release it.

12. Return the imprinter to the clear state by returning the money amount keys to the asterisk (*) positions and return the handle to the up position.

13. Remove the form set from the imprinter. Again, do NOT touch the upper-third portion of the set.

14. If any item has not printed clearly or correctly, treat the money order as spoiled. Spoiled money orders are covered later in this chapter.

15. Collect the amount for which the money order is issued plus the fee.

16. Detach and file the voucher in numerical sequence, taking care not to bend, fold, or mutilate it, and the carbons. Give the customer the customer’s receipt and money order.

17. Advise the customer to complete the money order and receipt by filling in the Pay To and From blocks as soon as possible and to retain the customer’s receipt.

Any customer whose daily total of purchased money orders is $3,000 or more, regardless of the number of visits made by the customer to one or more postal facilities, must complete a Funds Transaction Report (FTR), PS Form 8105-A, (To view PS Form 8105-A click here), and show identification bearing the purchaser's photograph, name and address.

Spoiled Money Orders

No alterations, changes, or erasures, in either words or figures, shall be made on any part of the money order form set. If a money order is incorrectly imprinted or completed incorrectly by the customer, it is considered to be SPOILED. A money order is treated as spoiled ONLY on the day it

p. 546

Rev. MAR 2013 21-25 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

was purchased, and ONLY if the money order and customer’s receipt is presented to the same clerk from whom it was purchased. If the money order is presented to another clerk or returned after the date of purchase, the money order should be cashed and a “No-Fee” money order issued as a replacement. No-fee money orders will be covered after you learn about spoiled or incorrectly prepared money orders.

Spoiled or Incorrectly Prepared Money Orders

The biggest reason for spoiling money orders is due to clerk error during issuing. Errors may include the following:

• Setting an incorrect date on the imprinter

• Setting an incorrect dollar amount, or

• Imprinter malfunction (does not produce a clear impression). Money orders can also be spoiled by the customer. Some examples are: • Purchaser or payee information is written incorrectly on the money order

• Purchaser inadvertently tears the money order, or

• Purchaser requests a money order for wrong amount. Whatever the reason, if the money order becomes unusable on the same business day, follow the steps below. (Figure 21-9.) Step 1: Collect the money order and customer receipt from the customer. Destroy the customer receipt and corresponding money order voucher. DO NOT DESTROY the money order.

Step 2: Write or stamp SPOILED in the PAY TO and FROM section of the money order.

Step 3: Place the spoiled money order in numerical sequence in the stack of issued money order vouchers.

Step 4: Issue a new money order to the customer for the same amount as the one spoiled (if amount was correct), but DO NOT collect a fee.

p. 547

Rev. MAR 2013 21-26 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Figure 21-9 — An example of a spoiled money order.

Conditions for Issuing “No Fee” Money Orders

A No-Fee money order is a money order issued or sold WITHOUT collection of a fee. You will issue money orders and NOT collect a fee when:

• A money order is used for remittance as part of official USPS business. An example would be issuing a money order for funds collected by finance clerks for postage meter business.

• A customer spoils a money order and returns it to an MPO (any window clerk selling money orders) to have it replaced on any day after the date of sale.

In this situation:

• The customer completes the Pay To and From sections on the front of the money order, if not already completed. The customer must also endorse the original money order on the reverse.

• The customer must give the money order and customer receipt to the money order clerk.

• The money order clerk issues a new money order for the same amount as the original money order. Include the original money order with your day’s business report as a PAID MONEY ORDER. Do NOT collect a fee.

Cashing Money Orders

As a money order clerk, you will also be cashing postal money orders. Only USPS money orders may be cashed at MPOs. Do not cash international money orders or personal checks.

p. 548

Rev. MAR 2013 21-27 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

NOTE

EXCEPTION: Canadian money orders may be cashed if they are drawn on the United States and the amount is given in U.S. currency. Money orders are valid for an indefinite period.

Identification

Before you accept a money order for cashing, you must identify the person whose name appears on the “Pay To” line. Military personnel, their dependents and authorized U.S. citizen government employees are provided with official identification cards (See Chapter 1). Identification cards will identify the bearer by photograph and signature. In those areas or under certain circumstances where authorized personnel are not issued official government identification cards, U.S. passports may be accepted for identification. Letters, club membership cards, social security cards, driver’s permits, or similar items may NOT be accepted as proof of identity.

Signature Requirements

The payee of a money order must sign the instrument in the presence of the accepting clerk. You may accept any signature of the person cashing the money order that is not different from the name given on the order. Money orders payable to organizations, societies, government agencies, and so forth, must be signed by a representative authorized to do so. You may require proof that the person is an authorized representative of that agency. The representative must sign the money order with his or her own name and organizational title.

Use of such titles as Dr., Capt., Sgt., MCPO, or Mrs., is not required in signing a money order for payment, even if the title is used on the face of the money order.

Customers who cannot write may sign by using a mark (usually an X) if a witness is present. The witness cannot be a person assigned to postal duties.

A money order completed by the purchaser to show more than one person as the payee will be paid as follows:

• If the conjunction “or” is used to connect the payees, either payee may cash the order.

• If no conjunction is used, or if the conjunction “and” is used to connect the payees, then all the listed payees must sign the order.

Transfer of Money Orders

Only the person whose name appears on the “Pay To” line of a money order may endorse it to another person or a firm. To endorse the money order over to another person or firm the following actions must be taken:

• The intended payee’s name is written on the back of the money order on the “Pay To” line

• The person transferring the money order signs under the words ENDORSEMENT SIGNATURE

p. 549

Rev. MAR 2013 21-28 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

• The person to whom the order was transferred will then sign under the original payee’s signature at the time it is presented for cashing.

Money Order Cashing Procedures

Money orders presented for payment should be cashed if you have sufficient funds in your money order account. If you do not have sufficient funds in your account, refer the customer to a local bank or suggest that they return later in the business day.

When a money order is presented for cashing:

• Check the person’s identification. Make sure the person presenting the money order for payment is the purchaser, payee, or first endorsee. If a passport is used as identification by authorized personnel who are not issued official government ID cards, enter the passport number on the back of the money order.

• Check to see if the money order has been changed. If alterations are noted, do not cash the money order. Also, check for watermark (picture of Benjamin Franklin) and security threads.

• Check the serial number of the money order against the latest lost or stolen money order list. Note that the list shows only the first 10 digits of the serial number. A new, lost, or stolen money order list is published periodically in the Postal Bulletin (To view Postal Bulletin click here). Each new list should be removed from the Postal Bulletin and posted at the money order window to replace the old list.

• Require the customer to sign the money order above the words ENDORSEMENT SIGNATURE.

• Stamp the money order with the APDS and initial it. (Figure 21-10.)

Money orders should be cashed regardless of whether such orders have been folded, stapled, or otherwise mutilated, provided the entries are clear and complete. A customer cashing over $10,000 of money orders in one day must complete PS Form 8105A.

Paid money orders must not be mixed with money order vouchers or spoiled money orders. They will be set aside for inclusion in the money order report, which will be discussed in the next section of this chapter.

p. 550

Rev. MAR 2013 21-29 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Figure 21-10 — An example of required endorsements for cashing money orders.

MONEY ORDER REPORTS

At the end of each business day, when money orders are sold, you must prepare a money order report. The report must account for all money orders sold, and spoiled, during the day. The COPE is responsible for ensuring that reports are prepared and submitted for each day money order business is conducted. The money order clerk prepares the report. Reports are submitted via On-Line reporting (Ships) and Requisition Control Unit (RCU) Upload (Ashore) in AMPS. Before you start to prepare the report, ensure that the Unit tape is in order and that all the issued money order vouchers and any spoiled money orders are accounted for and are in serial number order and that all paid money orders (cashed) are accounted for. Remember you learned that money order sets are issued in serial number order (that is, the lowest serial number to the highest). Your vouchers and spoiled money orders must be kept in the same order. After you have placed the vouchers and spoiled money orders (if any) in serial number order, you must determine the total cash value of the money orders sold.

Different Series of Money Order Forms

At times, you may have to issue money orders from two different number series on the same business day.

p. 551

Rev. MAR 2013 21-30 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Money Orders Issued Out of Sequence

Through error, you may at times issue money orders out of serial number order. You should return to the proper series as soon as the error is noted.

Once the money order sequencing mistake is noticed, the clerk has to reestablish the money order setup sequence, separating the first block of money orders before the sequencing error as money order block 1, establishing the money order quantity for that block. Once established, the clerk will set up the remaining money orders after the sequencing error as money order block 2, establishing the money order quantity for that second block. Step 1. Press Money Set Up key.

Step 2. Enter Money Order serial # that is out of sequence. Step 3. Press Enter. Step 4. Enter the amount of money order sold out of sequence. Step 5. Press Enter. Step 6. Block 2 Money Order Set Up-Enter money order serial # that is still in correct sequence and the amount remaining.

Step 7. Press Enter.

Missing Money Order Form Set

If, upon opening a sealed package of 100 money orders that are to be issued, you find a form set is missing, follow these procedures:

• Notify the MPO supervisor, or Postal Officer

• Prepare a letter reporting the missing money order and forward to the source of supply. Place a copy of the letter in numerical order where the missing form set would have been.

If a money order set is discovered missing after it was previously accounted for, notify the COPE, MPO supervisor, or Postal Officer. If the form cannot be found, the loss must be reported by message to Major Command (MACOM) as a postal offense.

Missing Voucher

If you discover that a money order voucher is missing, complete and enter on your MO tape, in the space where the amount of the missing voucher would normally appear, the words MISSING VOUCHER. (Figure 21-11)

After you audit your money order account, there should be an overage.

p. 552

Rev. MAR 2013 21-31 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

Figure 21-11 — An example of a Facsimile voucher.

No-Fee Money Orders

When a customer returns a money order after the day of issue because of an error, issue a replacement money order. If the customer has the MO receipt, do not charge a fee for the replacement money order.

Duplicate, Defective, and Mutilated Money Orders

• If a duplicate, defective, or mutilated MO is found, it will be treated as spoiled.

• If two money order forms are received with the same serial number, spoil one by writing NUMBER DUPLICATED across the face of one of them. The other may be issued as long as all other information is correct.

INTEGRATED RETAIL TERMINAL

The Unisys Series 2000 Integrated Retail Terminal (IRT) is the most technically advanced system available at a MPO. The IRT’s unique design assists the clerk in providing fast, accurate, and efficient service to the patron; however, the IRT is only available at shore-based MPO’s. What you have previously learned can be accomplished in a matter of seconds by just pressing one or two keys on the IRT keyboard. Some of the IRT’s capabilities include: automatic calculation of domestic and international postage rates; rate comparison between classes of mail; administrative report printing; ZIP Codes to postal zone conversion; and calculation. The IRT is also capable of recording each transaction as it is completed. This recording is an electronic journal of the day’s activities.

This system has been designed so that it can be operated with ease. The IRT is an integrated system comprised of three major components: the integrated module, the customer display, and the receipt printer. Below is a brief explanation of each component:

• INTEGRATED MODULE— The integrated module is the system’s main component. It contains the electronic scale, clerk display, keyboard, and disk drive. It also houses the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and resident memory.

p. 553

Rev. MAR 2013 21-32 LS: Chapter 21— Postal Finance

• CUSTOMER DISPLAY—T his is a seven-inch remote display, which can be placed up to 6 feet from the integrated module. The customer display shows the same information as the clerk’s display.

• RECEIPT PRINTER— This component is used to print, on demand, both customer receipts and administrative reports. The printer does not have a power switch. It is activated automatically when printing administrative reports or customer’s receipts. If you want the printer to print all transactions as you enter them into the system, then you can activate the printer by pressing the PRINT ON/OFF key on the keyboard. The printer has an out-of-paper indicator light and a paper advance button on its front panel. When a new roll of paper needs to be installed, the indicator light goes on, an electronic alarm sounds, and a pop-up printer error window appears on your screen. Use the paper advance button any time you want to advance receipts or blank paper.

p. 554

Rev. MAR 2013 22-1

CHAPTER 22

MAIL HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

As a mail orderly, or mail clerk, you are dealing with an important factor in military life morale. Mail contributes as much to the morale of the military services as any other single factor. Mail to/from home is an important way for your shipmates to maintain contact with family and friends as well as conducting personal business. Often mail is of legal or financial significance. You never know when a letter may contain a document or an item of information that will profoundly affect the affairs of the recipient. Therefore, every letter must be handled as if it were of utmost importance.

When you work in a mailroom you will become aware that mail is used for logistical support. Navy and Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) supply commands forward high-priority parts by mail for ships and aircraft deployed worldwide. Navy exchanges use mail services to overseas areas to provide merchandise for patrons. There is always the official correspondence vital to mission readiness and the well-being of the ship’s company.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15. Recognize the personnel who handle incoming and outgoing mail and their responsibilities. Recall the structural requirements for unit mailrooms; security requirements for keys, combinations, mail, mailroom spaces; and the procedures to transport, process, deliver mail. Recall the responsibility for funding and the types of transportation available for military mail. Determine the appropriate manifest to use to transport mail and the preparation requirements for each.

Recall the procedures for receipting for mail from the various types of carriers. Recall the procedures for processing incoming mail at a shipboard or overseas MPO. Recognize the different ways mail can be sent without prepayment of postage and the manner in which these types of mail are processed.

Recall the procedures for processing incoming international mail

Recall procedures for completing mail logs and handling surplus (MTE). Recall the steps for preparing mail for dispatch. Recall the procedures and equipment used in postmarking and canceling mail. Recall the procedures for collecting and preparing outgoing mail for dispatch. Recall the recommended locations for placement of mail collection boxes, their construction, security requirements.

Recall the procedures for proper pouching of outgoing mail. Recall the procedures for proper pouching of outgoing mail.

CHAPTER 22

p. 555

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-2

DEFINITIONS

This section focuses on mail orderly service and mailroom operations in their entirety. The definitions of mail handling personnel and facilities are as follows:

• Mail orderly: An individual designated by proper authority to perform mail-handling duties, but does NOT operate a mailroom.

• Mail clerk: An individual designated by proper authority to do mail duties in association with the operation of a Unit Mailroom (UMR) or a Postal Service Center (PSC) that is not considered a section of a Military Post Office (MPO).

• Postal Officer/Official Mail Manager: A member or civilian employee of the U.S. Armed Forces, or an employee of a civilian agency, designated by proper authority to supervise the operation of a UMR.

• Unit mailroom: A room or enclosure with proper security that serves as a secure place for unit mail clerks to receive, process, deliver and dispatch mail.

• Serving postal activity: A local military or civilian post office or Fleet Mail Center (FMC) that provides postal support.

Qualifications of Mail Clerks and Mail Orderlies

All personnel conducting mail-handling duties, including Local Nationals, in an area other than a section of an MPO, shall be designated as a "unit mail clerk" or “unit mail orderly." These personnel shall meet the following qualifications:

• Have no record of:

o Conviction by court-martial under UCMJ Article 15 o Civil court conviction related to a theft or a financial or postal incident.

o Derogatory information or unfavorable conduct that casts doubt on the individual's trustworthiness and integrity.

• Have no history of psychiatric disorder, alcoholism, or drug abuse, unless a medical evaluation determines the condition no longer exists.

• Have not been relieved of postal duties for cause.

• Be a U.S. citizen if handling official Registered mail, and be eligible for a SECRET clearance (have an Entrance National Agency Check (ENTNAC) or National Agency Check (NAC) on file). Local nationals shall not handle official Registered mail. To preclude unauthorized receipt of registered mail, annotate the DD Form 285, mail authorized to receive block, "except official Registered mail" for foreign nationals performing mail handling duties.

Designation of Mail Clerks, Mail Orderlies Postal Officers/Official Mail Managers

Unit Commanders or their designated representatives (i.e., assigned unit Postal Officer or assistant unit Postal Officer) shall designate unit mail clerks.

Responsible officials for those offices and activities requiring mail orderly service may designate mail orderlies. Document designations using DD Form 285 before personnel assume mail-handling duties. The number of designated mail clerks or mail orderlies and alternates shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the requirement to handle mail efficiently and effectively. Always designate a minimum

p. 556

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-3

of one primary and one alternate mail clerk or orderly. A list should be provided to the host postal activity. The host postal activity shall screen and review a unit's requirements.

The unit commander shall designate unit Postal Officers/official mail manager and alternates, in writing. Do not use DD Form 285 to document this. However, Postal Officers involved in mail handling duties require a DD Form 285 to do those duties.

Designations do not require renewal if the designating official changes

Training Requirements

Before entering into mail handling duties, the servicing postal activity will provide formal instruction to selected personnel covering the proper performance of these duties. This instruction shall emphasize the importance of safeguarding mail, handling of accountable mail, timely delivery, and the serious consequences of negligence of duty.

Mail Orderly Responsibilities

Mail orderlies normally are charged only with the safeguarding and delivery of incoming personal mail. Specific responsibilities of a mail orderly include:

Delivering personal mail to addressees only

Placing undeliverable mail in a suitable, securely locked container and delivering it later (as soon as possible) or returning it at the end of the workday to the UMR or post office, as applicable

Returning undeliverable-as-addressed mail to the UMR or serving post office with the reason for non-delivery (TDY, leave, or transferred)

Reporting any known or suspected postal offenses and irregularities to the Postal Officer or Commanding Officer

Mail orderlies from the Administrative Department, at large commands from other departments, have additional responsibility for delivering official mail.

Mail Clerk Responsibilities

Mail clerks must be designated and properly trained to provide mail service and operate UMRs in accordance with DOD 4525.6M . Specific responsibilities include:

• Safeguarding mail at all times

• Maintaining an up-to-date mail directory file of ALL personnel served, due to report, of personnel who have transferred during the last 12 months (3 months for personnel who were Temporary Duty (TDY), or trainees stationed less than 6 months at a training command)

• Performing prompt directory service on all undeliverable-as-addressed mail and returning it to the serving post office as soon as possible, but no later than the following workday after receipt

• Maintaining accountable mail records when provisions are implemented to deliver accountable mail from the unit mailroom

• Correcting all discrepancies noted on mailroom and post office inspections as soon as possible

• Reporting known or suspected postal offenses to the Commanding Officer via the Official Mail Manager/ Postal Officer immediately.

p. 557

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-4

UNIT MAILROOM OPERATIONS AND MAIL ORDERLY SERVICE

Commanding Officers must furnish the command mail clerk with mailroom space and equipment as needed for the proper processing and security of the mail. Only essential furniture, mail, mail records should be kept in mailroom spaces. Mailrooms should be kept in an orderly condition at all times. A sign shall be posted showing the hours of operation and times of mail call designated by the Commanding Officer. This notice or sign must be posted in a prominent place outside the mailroom. An example of the unit mailing address should also be posted in a prominent place outside the mailroom.

PSC, CMR, and UMR Inspections

Supervisors shall check PSCs, CMRs, and UMRs daily to ensure that mail is handled correctly and promptly.

Supervisors should also conduct weekly self-inspections (document inspections per applicable Military Department requirements). The inspection should include, but is not limited to, an examination of the following:

• Compliance with current postal policies and procedures.

• Maintenance of directory files and unit postal records.

• Mailroom security.

The Postal Officer/Official Manager, MPO supervisor, or a designated representative of the servicing military postal activity shall conduct unannounced inspections of CMRs, or UMRs serviced.

Mailroom Structural Requirements

Mailrooms must be built in a manner that provides adequate security for the mail and must meet the following requirements:

• Doors must be provided with suitable locks. Keep the number of postal facility access doors to an absolute minimum. Postal facility access doors shall be of sheet metal material not less than 16 gauge in thickness, or a solid wooden door covered on the outside with a steel plate not less than 12 gauge in thickness. Hinges shall be installed so it will be impossible to remove the closed door without seriously damaging the door or jam. The door shall be locked with high security padlocks and hasps. Install the locking bars and hasps to prevent unauthorized access to the room. Arrange the heads of the bolts and screws so that they cannot be removed from the exterior side. Glass doors used for post office lobby entrances shall have steel bar doors and gates for added security.

• Windows easily accessible from the outside must be barred or covered with heavy wire mesh

• Walls and ceilings must be built of materials that prevent forcible entry

• Mail receptacles (individual mailboxes), when used, shall be installed so that only authorized personnel have access to them.

Control of Keys and Combinations

The keys or combinations to the mailroom, locked containers, safes, or other locked mail receptacles must be in the possession of the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE). Keys must be safeguarded at all times. Duplicate keys and copies of combinations must be sealed in separate Duplicate Key

p. 558

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-5

Inventory (Envelopes), PS Form 3977 and receipted for on Key Receipt, PS Form 1096. Prepare PS Form 1096 in duplicate. Maintain the original in the mailroom and duplicates should be kept in a safe controlled by the Commanding Officer or designated representative. The sealed envelopes must be signed across the flaps by both the original key holder and the recipient of PS Form 3977. Whenever accountability for combinations or keys change, new envelopes must be prepared. A receipt PS Form 1096 must be prepared in duplicate and signed by the individual receiving the PS Form 3977. The COPE retains the original in the post office files.

The individual holding the duplicate keys or combinations shall sign the "key log book," which will indicate the date received and the date returned.

Access to Mailroom

The only personnel authorized to enter a UMR are those personnel conducting official business. Proper identification and authorization must be verified before allowing entry. This requirement does not apply to a properly supervised and authorized working party handling closed mails.

SECURITY OF MAIL

Mail clerks and mail orderlies may be held liable for any loss caused by their failure to handle mail properly.

Mail-handling areas and all receptacles for accountable mail must be locked when the responsible individual(s) are not physically present. While mail is in the custody of mail clerks or mail orderlies, it must not be subject to delay, interception, seizure, rifling, or confiscation by any person. Mail clerks and mail orderlies must deliver mail only to the addressee or an agent designated in writing by the addressee. Unit mailrooms that store official Registered Mail™ overnight must have a GSA approved security container that is properly secured to prevent easy removal or the mailroom must meet the requirements for storing classified material.

TRANSPORTING MAIL

A closed body vehicle equipped with lockable doors must be used to transport mail to and from mail service areas. If such a vehicle is unavailable and another kind is used, mail clerks and mail orderlies should ride in the compartment that holds the mail. If conditions prohibit personnel from riding in the compartment with the mail, visual contact should be maintained with the mail at all times. Privately owned vehicles will not be used to transport mail. If an abnormal situation occurs where a privately owned vehicle must be used, written approval must first be obtained from the Commanding Officer. All mail except Outside Pieces (OSPs) should be transported in U.S. Postal Service (USPS) mailbags.

When using any vehicle to transport mail, passengers not authorized to handle mail shall not have access to the mail.

Delivery of Ordinary Mail

Personal mail should be delivered to the addressee through the use of individual mail receptacles or by using the mail orderly system. When the mail orderly system is used, check the member’s Appointment of Military Postal Clerk, Unit Mail Clerk or Mail Orderly, DD Form 285 and verify it against the member’s ID card.

The mail orderly system is the most common method used by U.S. Navy. Mail orderlies pick up mail for their department or division and redistribute the mail to the addressee. Under no circumstances

p. 559

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-6

should they place mail on bunks or tables, in open boxes, or similar places, or otherwise leave mail unprotected while awaiting delivery. Undelivered mail must be stowed in securely locked containers or spaces for future delivery to the addressee(s) or returned to the UMR for safekeeping. Mail orderlies must print and sign their name on a suitable log or sheet when they pick up mail for their activity. The log should also show the name of the activity and date the mail was picked up (Figure 22-1).

USS UNDERWAY CV-66 MAIL CALL SHEET

DIVISION CARD # PRINT NAME SIGNATURE

ADMIN

STAFF ADMIN AIR MEDICAL DENTAL S-1 S-2

S-3

S-4

S-5

NAVIGATION COMM OI WEAPONS DECK A

Figure 22-1.—E xample of a command mail call sheet.

These general guidelines should be followed when accepting, processing, delivering mail:

• Before receipting for mail at the serving postal activity, mail clerks and mail orderlies must ensure that damaged articles are properly endorsed and the articles are repaired or rewrapped if needed. If damaged articles are received in closed bags; unit mail clerks must repair the

p. 560

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-7

articles and endorse them, "RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION". The date of receipt and identity of the unit that made the repairs should also be endorsed on the articles.

• Mail suspected of containing harmful matter must be immediately reported to a supervisor

• Mail addressed to unit members by title (Commanding Officer, Administrative Officer, so forth) is considered official mail, must be delivered through official mail channels.

• Registered Mail™ rec eived as ordinary mail must be returned to the registry section of the serving post office. Firm Mailing Book for Accountable Mail, PS Form 3877 is prepared in duplicate and modified for the return of Registered Mail™ with the endorsement, "FOUND IN ORDINARY MAIL AT (location)", placed on the front of the bill (Figure 22-2).

• If Domestic Registered Mail is found with ordinary mail the UMC will fill out PS Form 3826 and submit to Post Master of originating office.

• Mail addressed in care of another person or addressed to more than one addressee may be delivered to any addressee listed in the address

• At shore activities a competent member of the family who has a valid ID card may be given mail addressed to the family, except mail items reflecting restricted delivery. However, the sponsor may state in writing that no member, other than the sponsor, should have access to the mail

• Other accountable mail, such as insured and certified received as ordinary mail must also be returned to the serving post office for proper accountability

• Cash on Delivery (COD) service is not available in the military postal service. C.O.D. mail will be returned to the sender. Endorse mail “RETURN TO SENDER— SERVICE NOT AVAILABLE"

• Postage-due mail will be delivered as regular mail without the collection of postage

• Mail opened by mistake must be resealed, endorsed "OPENED BY MISTAKE", signed by the person who opened the mail. The mail will be returned to the serving post office, so it can be forwarded to the correct addressee

• Balloting material must be given priority handling and delivered as quickly as possible

• Articles refused by the addressee must be endorsed "REFUSED", along with the addressee’s signature and date. If the addressee refuses to make the endorsement, the mail clerk or mail orderly must endorse the article "REFUSED BY ADDRESSEE", date and sign the article

• Stamps found loose in the mail must be returned to the serving post office

• Every effort must be made to match articles found loose in the mail. Articles not matched must be returned to the serving post office.

p. 561

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-8

Figure 22-2 — Example of a modified PS Form 3877 for the return of Registered Mail™ found in the ordinary mail at a unit mailroom.

Delivery of Official Accountable Mail

A unit mail clerk or mail orderly (if authorized) receipts for official accountable mail from the serving post office. The serving post office uses Firm Delivery Receipt, PS Form 3883, preparing an original and two copies of the form. The original remains at the post office and the copies are given to the mail orderly.

Before receipting for official accountable mail, the unit mail clerk or mail orderly should verify the article numbers and inspect the wrappers for damage. The post office should repair the mailing containers or rewrap the articles, place the endorsement "RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION" on the mail and annotate on the delivery bill that the article(s) were damaged. If damaged articles are

p. 562

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-9

received in closed bags, they should be repaired and endorsed, "RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION" with the date of receipt and the identity of the unit repairing the article.

Before official accountable mail is signed for by department or division mail orderlies from a unit mail clerk, the accountable mail must be listed on a PS Form 3883 by identifying numbers and office of origin. Whenever a mail clerk releases control of official accountable mail to a department or division mail orderly, proper receipting procedures must always be followed to ensure accountability. Accountable official mail must be covered by a chain of receipts from the time the mail is accepted by unit mail clerks until delivery has been made to the appropriate mail orderly. If the mail clerk or mail orderly has the Commanding Officer’s authority to open official mail, it is considered to be delivered once receipted for at the serving post office or UMR and no further transfer receipts are required. Unit mail clerks must return all undeliverable-as-addressed accountable mail to the serving post office on PS Form 3877 prepared in duplicate. The accepting postal clerk will sign for the accountable mail and keep the original PS Form 3877 for records purposes. The unit mail clerk must keep the signed copy of PS Form 3877 for mailroom records. The PS Form 3877 is annotated to show the disposition of the returned article (Figure 22-3).

Figure 22-3 — Example of PS Form 3877 for "Undeliverable as Addressed" accountable mail.

p. 563

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-10

Delivery of Personal Accountable Mail

Personal accountable mail should be delivered by the serving post office to the addressee or an authorized agent. The serving post office should provide the unit mail clerk or mail orderly with a Delivery Notice/Reminder/Receipt, PS Form 3849, which will be given to the addressee when the mail is delivered.

Delivery of Personal Accountable Mail from a Mailroom

If a unit is geographically isolated from the serving post office, Commanding Officers may authorize mail clerks to receipt for and deliver personal accountable mail. This authority must be in writing and kept on file at the UMR, with a copy provided to the serving post office. Once this authority is granted the responsibility to prepare and maintain PS Form 3849 will also be transferred to the unit. Personal accountable mail will then be delivered to unit mail clerks by the serving post office using a PS Form 3883 as a delivery receipt.

When personal accountable mail is received from the serving post office, the unit mail clerk must do the following:

• Use PS Form 3849 to notify customers of their accountable mail. The form is prepared the day the article is received and delivered with the ordinary mail

• Annotate the article with the date the notice was prepared, store the article separately from non-accountable mail

• Positive identification is required from the addressee or authorized agent before delivering the accountable mail. An ID card or U.S. passport that identifies the bearer by photograph and signature is acceptable

• Obtain the addressee’s or authorized agent’s signature on PS Form 3849 before delivering the article. If a return receipt is attached to accountable mail, it must also be signed and dated by the addressee. The return receipt should be returned promptly to the sender

• Date and sign PS Form 3849 and file the form.

• PS Form 3849s are filed numerically by the last two digits of the identifying article number and retained for 2 years. The forms are filed in a single file. However, a separate file may be used for forms used to deliver registered articles if there are a large number of forms to retain.

Retention Period for Accountable Mail

When accountable mail has not been called for within 5 days (3 days for Express Mail®) of initiating the PS Form 3849, prepare a second PS Form 3849 and send the second notice to the addressee. On the article next to the first endorsement, annotate the date the second notice was prepared. If the article has not been called for after 10 days from the second notice (2 days for Express Mail®), you should verify the addressee’s status through the respective department or division. Based on the information received:

• Endorse the article with the correct forwarding address if available, or endorse it with the RETURN TO SENDER stamp. If there is a return receipt attached to the article, ensure it remains attached to the article

• Prepare a PS Form 3849 showing disposition of the undeliverable accountable article on the reverse side of the form and sign and date the form

p. 564

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-11

• File the completed PS Form 3849 and return the undeliverable article to the serving post office using PS Form 3877 (Figure 22-3).

RESTRICTED DELIVERY

The sender at the time of mailing may direct registered, certified, insured for over $200 be delivered only to the addressee or to someone named by them in writing. The endorsement "RESTRICTED DELIVERY" is used for this purpose. Other markings such as PERSONAL are not to be considered as indicating restricted delivery services.

Addressees can authorize other individuals to receive their mail, including restricted delivery mail, by completing a Standing Delivery Order, PS Form 3801 (Figure 22-4) at the serving MPO.

STORAGE OF ACCOUNTABLE MAIL AWAITING DELIVERY

You should store accountable mail in a manner that allows easy retrieval when it is called for by an addressee with the exception of Registered Mail™, which will be kept in a secure area away from other mail. The volume of mail and the amount of floor space in your mailroom will normally dictate a workable system for your situation. All accountable mail should be stored in a manner that allows easy and quick monitoring during retention periods and for follow-up action with PS Form 3849 as previously discussed.

Figure 22-4 — Example of a Standing Delivery Order, PS Form 3801.

p. 565

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-12

TRANSPORTATION OF MILITARY MAIL

The MPS is responsible for moving military mail responsively, economically, efficiently in support of the defense missions of the United States. Military mail is any domestic or international mail that bears a military address or return address and at some stage in its transmission is in the possession of the DOD. Now we will discuss funding for mail transportation, the types of documentation methods, documentation requirements.

Funding for Military Mail Transportation

USPS pays for the movement of military mail by commercial air carriers, foreign and domestic. The military departments then reimburse USPS for the movement of mail to and from the United States and within overseas areas. Additionally, the military departments pay for movement of military mail between the United States, its territories, commonwealths, possessions when a mode of transportation is selected or a service is provided that is not available to domestic USPS customers. The Navy also pays for mail moved via Air Mobility Command airlift, rail, or truck within each command’s area of responsibility, unless prior arrangements have been made with Military Postal Service Agency (MPSA).

Types of Transportation Methods

The specific modes of transportation used for the movement of military mail are airlift, sealift, and land transportation. The transportation used depends on the location, available transportation, and lead-time.

NOTE

Sealift is only used to dispatch surface mail from CONUS to overseas locations. As a postal clerk, you will be directly concerned with the available modes of transportation, when to use them, how much space will be available, the proper documentation required depending upon the method of transportation used by your office.

U.S. Carriers

All eligible military mail transported to and from overseas activities will be transported by U.S. commercial air carriers as the primary means of transportation. The USPS and MPSA, along with the JMPAs located in New York, NY and Los Angeles, CA, have already established transportation routes and coordinated with commercial airlines to provide the necessary service needed to move military mail to its intended destination(s). Parcel airlift (PAL) mail and Space-Available Mail (SAM) should be tendered last to an air carrier after all other categories of mail have been accepted.

Military mail tendered to U.S. commercial airlines by MPO’s will be manifested on Military Mail AV-7 Delivery List, (PS Form 2942-A). We will discuss this form later in the chapter.

Foreign Air Carriers

p. 566

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-13

When U.S. commercial air carriers or U.S. military air carriers are not available, MPO’s may request the services of a foreign air carrier to transport military mail. The initial request to use a foreign commercial air carrier must be directed to MPSA, who coordinates with USPS to obtain approval. Approval to use a foreign air carrier will be limited to those routes where U.S. commercial air service or U.S. military aircraft are not available, or do not meet established delivery service standards. If the request is approved by MPSA and USPS, the affected military postal unit(s) will be notified of the approved air carrier, flight dates, and flight numbers before shipping any mail. The use of foreign airlines will be discontinued or modified when adequate U.S. commercial or military air service becomes available.

Military postal units must use Military Mail AV-7 Delivery List, PS Form 2942-A, to manifest mail for transport on approved commercial air carriers. When using a foreign air, carrier postal clerks must do the following:

• Pouch all mail (no outside pieces). This means that First-Class mail, in letter trays, must be placed inside large U.S. Priority Mail pouches. Other classes of mail must be placed inside an appropriately colored and labeled mail pouch, before dispatching

• Make arrangements with the foreign airline representative to accept the mail

• Provide the foreign airline representative with the estimated volume (pieces and kg-weight) that will be dispatched, the flight number used, the frequency of dispatch, the end destination where the mail will be off-loaded

• Ask the foreign airline rep to inform their representatives at the end destination to expect receipt of U.S military mail shipment(s) and that the mail should be turned over only to U.S. military postal personnel and not to the host government. This does not apply for dispatches from overseas locations to CONUS

• Ensure that military postal personnel at the end destination (overseas locations only) are aware of shipments by foreign airline and all particulars so that MPS personnel can make arrangements to meet the flight and receive the mail as soon as possible. Never send outside mail or Registered Mail™ via a foreign air carrier unless authorized by the area mail control activity.

Air Mobility Command Aircraft

The U.S. Air Force operates military cargo and cargo/passenger aircraft and contracts to private airlines to carry passengers, cargo, mail. Use of Air Mobility Command assets is limited to areas where U.S. commercial air carriers do not provide service (such as hostile areas), or the frequency of flights or space is insufficient and cannot ensure delivery. Air Mobility Command assets may also be used whenever adequate surface transportation is not available, when transit times for surface mail is considered excessive, or when SAM cannot be moved by commercial carriers in a timely manner and an inordinate amount of delay would occur before the mail would be transported.

Military postal units will use Transportation Control and Movement Document, DD Form 1384 better known as a “TCMD,” to manifest military mail for shipment by Air Mobility Command aircraft.

Command-Owned Air Carriers

Once mail is received at overseas locations, airlift transport is provided for deployed ships by the services of an air squadron based in the area of operation. Mail is transported by COD to the aircraft carrier for further transfer by VERTREP or UNREP.

p. 567

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-14

Military Sealift Command

Surface mail is transported by commercial ships as arranged by the Military Sealift Command (MSC). Sea-Van containers are used for dispatching mail sealifted between the United States and overseas areas, between geographical locations overseas. Sea-Van containers provide security and eliminate unnecessary handling of the mail. Postal activities using Sea-Van containers for dispatching mail should properly secure the doors of the containers with a numbered tin-band seal (USPS Item 0817A), heavy gauge wire to other ships operating with the aircraft carrier as part of the battle group.

Command Mail Vehicles

MPCs will use Mail Manifest, DD Form 1372 or OPNAV Form 5110/9 when dispatching mail locally. A closed-body vehicle equipped with lockable doors must be used to transport mail between postal activities or carrier facilities on or off the installation. If the vehicle driver is not a designated postal clerk and has a key or combination to the lock used to secure the vehicle, then a tin-band seal, Item 0817C, should be affixed to the secured doors. This will maintain the integrity of the shipment to other ships operating with the aircraft carrier as part of the battle group.

Command Mail Vehicles

MPCs will use OPNAV Form 5110/9, Mail Manifest, when dispatching mail locally. A closed-body vehicle equipped with lockable doors must be used to transport mail between postal activities or carrier facilities on or off the installation. If the vehicle driver is not a designated postal petty officer and has a key or combination to the lock used to secure the vehicle, then a tin-band seal, Item 0817A, should be affixed to the secured doors. This will maintain the integrity of the shipment.

If a designated postal petty officer, serving as a mail guard, is accompanying the shipment, or the vehicle driver does not have access to the key or combination to the lock, then a tin-band seal is not required. But, a tin-band seal is mandatory if Registered Mail™ is b eing transported. The seal number must be entered on the mail manifest by the dispatching activity.

If an open-body vehicle is used, a guard must ride in the truck body with the mail. This precaution is not required in those situations where mail is being transported on pallets or in igloos. In this case, the guard may ride in the cab of the truck, but must maintain visual contact of the mail at all times. Extreme care must be taken to make sure the vehicle doors close properly and that the doors do not open while in transit.

DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPATCHING

This section is concerned with accounting for the mail. You should always obtain a receipt for all mail dispatched and received at your MPO. Mail should be documented for shipment on Military Mail AV-7 Delivery List, PS Form 2942-A, Transportation Control and Movement Document (TCMD), DD Form 1384, or Mail Manifest, OPNAV Form 5110/9 depending upon the transportation utilized.

PS Form 2942-A (Av-7)

Use this form to dispatch mail on any domestic or foreign commercial air carrier. Prepare PS Form 2942-A (Figure 22-5) neatly and legibly, using a ballpoint pen (black ink) typewriter, or by completing a computer-generated form.

• When military mail is dispatched to and transported solely by a U.S. commercial air carrier or a single foreign-flag air carrier, prepare one PS Form 2942-A form set.

p. 568

LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation Rev. MAR 2013 22-15

• When mail is transferred between a U.S. air carrier and a foreign-flag air carrier, or between two U.S. carriers, prepare sufficient sets of PS Form 2942-A to allow each carrier five copies.

PS Form 2942-A is a printed set of seven sheets. You must provide a completed original and four copies to the air carrier representative at the time of the dispatch. Keep two legible copies of each completed AV-7. One will be retained in the dispatching activity’s files, the other will be sent to Postal Technical Advisor, Code 54, 5450 Carlisle Pike, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055 weekly by First-Class USPS indicia mail.

The form breaks down mail into three categories: Expedited, Preferred (letter class and priority), Deferred (SAM) In a previous lesson you learned about the different categories of mail, but we didn’t cover Military Ordinary Mail. MOM consists of official mail sent by military departments, mailed at the Standard Mail or Periodicals postage rates, that require faster than sealift transportation service to and from the United States and between overseas points, but does not require priority service. Mailings must bear the “MOM” marking in addition to the class of mail.

List Express Mail®, First-Class, Priority mail as “AIR.” Place the piece count for Express and First- Class mail letters in the “LC” column. List all Express and Priority mail parcels in the “CP” column. The categories MOM and SAM are self-explanatory. DO NOT list MOM or SAM mail in the “LC” column.

p. 569

Rev. MAR 2013 22-16

r LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

DISPATCHING OFFICE United States PostalService AV-7 CONSIGNMENT NO.

M I LI TARY MAIL AV-7 DELIVE RY BILL 001 SCL Check one I APO X l FPO DPO RECEIVING BUREAU FOR AIRPORT OF l.!Yrp.ncL.t:'J.tfe .o.lll uJ:io.-""""' 1

USS FORD MI A

FFG-54 Carrier.Flight. andRouting

FPO AP 96665-1508 AA-912 /M IA

l:iJ:GDlll. r.itiJ. iJl!.ChnQ.f

Contract Number

DATE OF DEPARTURE Container Number

July 20,2009

Office of Office of Expedited Preferred Deferred Class Gross Weight Origin Destination lEfiJJ..a?:s:s.I ll UL.t.I?BJJ .L:iiML/ Code of the Mail Remarks Observations AHp#'t Co-k AHpBTtC C....un.t CDURI C..unt { KC..m,) SCL MIA 16 7C 102.0 / ,/ SCL MIA 10 70 90.5

/ SCL MIA 2 7E 14.2

('/ v \ v

'\ / ) r 1\ / I v II I \ / v / /\ \ I I I A \ v ...--- \ v I I \ \ / ( I II LJ \ !--" I) \ \ I v / A \ r1 v r v I 1\ \ J I I ,.._I[/ v /

TOTALS 0 28 0 206.7

Signature of Clerk/Posta lPetty Officer dispatching the mail Signature of Air Carrier RepresentatYi e accepting the mail at origin Q rn J. P.. Q fR !Pnh n nL I: n

Figure 22-5- An example of a PS Form 2942-A. Key points to remember when preparing the AV-7 are as follows: • Begin each month with 001. Place an "X" after the number to indicate the last dispatch of the month (e. g., 024X).

p. 570

Rev. MAR 2013 22-17

LS: Chapter 22—M ail Handling and Transportation

• Manifest APO and FPO mail separately.

• All weights must be expressed in kilograms, rounded off to the nearest 1/10th of a kilo (e.g., 292.5 kg).

DD Form 1384 (TCMD)

DD Form 1384 “TCMD” (Figures 22-6 and 22-7) is a multipurpose form used when transporting any item within the DOD transportation network. This form is used when manifesting mail for transport by Air Mobility Command or Military Sealift Command (MSC) assets.

Manifest APO and FPO mail separately. List all classes and types of mail on the same form with the exception of Registered Mail™. Pre pare a separate form to manifest Registered Mail™.

For a single shipment of ordinary mail, complete blocks 1 through 23 as applicable.

NOTE

When completing blocks of the TCMD that require a date entry, enter the Julian date, unless otherwise specified.

OPNAV Form 5110/9

When mail will be transported by COD flight or opportune aircraft, the mail should be manifested on OPNAV Form 5110/9 (Figure 22-8). The form is self-explanatory and may be used for all classes of mail. However, you should use a separate OPNAV Form 5110/9 for manifesting Registered Mail™ (Figure 22-9).

When you prepare the form, stamp the original and each copy with the APDS in the date block and sign it. For record purposes you should make sure that enough copies are made to provide copies to all concerned units. For example, if a dispatch is being prepared for several fleet units, each unit should receive a copy of the manifest, the loadmaster should have a copy, your office must have a copy signed by the loadmaster. You must retain signed copies of manifests used to dispatch Registered Mail™ for 2 years. Signed copies of manifests used to dispatch regular mail are retained for 6 months only. After these respective time periods, if no claim or mail tracer has been initiated, the forms may be destroyed.

OPNAV Form 5110/9 may also be used to document mail transported for delivery or dispatch to or from other postal activities by truck.

Generally, when a ship arrives in a port where an FMC or MPO is located, the mail for the unit is dispatched by truck to the pier or fleet landing. When dispatching a unit’s mail by truck, you should prepare OPNAV Form 5110/9 in triplicate; retain the signed triplicate suspense copy in the post office.

The clerk who delivers the mail signs the triplicate copy and obtains the required signatures and date of delivery on the original and duplicate copy(s) of the OPNAV Form 5110/9 when the mail is delivered to the respective unit(s). The original should be given to the clerk accepting delivery for the unit. The duplicate copy of OPNAV Form 5110/9 is retained by the delivering FMC or MPO, the triplicate suspense copy with the dispatching clerk’s signature is destroyed.

p. 571

Rev. MAR 2013 22-18 LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

I il• I p s !

i I 0

In cases where shipboard MPOs are operated by only one clerk, a suspense copy of OPNAV Form 5110/9 is also required when mail is transported to an FMC or MPO.

lij a .. a ; - If • ! .. I

... .. ..I

II· r-- 15 • ... l i=I! ]e• I. ! A l'f· I y I ..: I.. I i• ..

:> .-tO.. Cl• t- I ·I • .r. N Jf i l II I I to .. i I ' ! I I; i 0 • • a - I I J o... !::' I s !

I N:llODIM

9 I g I

;;;

I f• L! I §l!•

0.. .... ., • I ·Ill ... lo; g [9 !! E

IIi 2 I k: ..,j ... i

:l §i r. I .. • • · [JI a§n

-= • ...

p. 572

Rev. MAR 2013 22-19 LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-6- An example of a completed DO Form 1384- Transportation Control and Movement Document (TCMD) for ordinary mail.

p. 573

Rev. MAR 2013 22-20 LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

· 0 a.. !) i < z I I I l;j; 5 t I! g if 3

0 !

!J.- ; :! I .6 - .:!. 0 [.J . ...

... .. N I... ; tn E li I ... ,....,. aR ... ... II 'F .....

1:: ! I - .... § i lit) ID t: I! i! -

... ... :2 ;. §.. . ... ffi • gA :- :E I - I. 8 ! ...;.;· i !'; C) 0

w 2 I z0 I f .. ;.. i s

I :s 5 Ii2ii•i i u .. - If: I f I . I

0 I I! ft:ICIOW

9 I lij

;; 'i .. , IR' · § i i s

(3' II IJ

';jj I- .. g Ui w

2 0. [tl l... ... If

r Ri t

(I) ! I.§. I e. I; .. ,P- u. r;. g 8 • ·- ·-_, _ -'- ,'-

p. 574

Rev. MAR 2013 22-21 LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-7-An example of a completed DD Form 1384-TCMD for Registered Mail™.

p. 575

Rev. MAR 2013 22-22 LS: Chapter 22-Mail Handling and Transportation

' -II )( i "'

,-- :LWi. WIH1EST' '''11111;111! ro 1'-'0IX 011. · t u

:Vj!;: ;-: I

I , ·.IOG':..t! f ·.·............

-...... :.- " "' -

r; 'f t . LSSN ABLE SEAMAN

' moe ·;.:,"'r U..,.....!"-. ...J!-' --'! ... ..... --. ---

110 lt'..W JJX. (11),0

ft AW .In! U4..ft

't1 '1<.\,\1 .me tOO •

2 u:u Ufl,.'\ G.'lo:trr \'I'J:\0 SM. 9-1.. f).'T

..............

"""'

...............

·ro.-.... i ' .3-0 4l30 'YW'I t.ril[D llli:L'I. """rt'1M'.Irlt !c:!l ONat:Efl(l.OW

.-·...... .· .........

Dll.n cwt out· C)A!J;,

Figure 22-8- An example of a completed OPNAV Form 5110/9 for ordinary mail dispatch.

p. 576

Rev. MAR 2013 22-23 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-9 — An example of a completed OPNAV Form 5110/9 for Registered Mail™ dispatch.

RECEIPTING FOR MAIL

When mail is received from a U.S. or foreign commercial air carrier, you will receipt for the incoming mail by signing the carrier’s copies of the AV-7 that accompanies the mail. Any irregularities must be noted on all copies of the document before you receipt for the mail. Any mail received by Air Mobility Command or MSC should be receipted for on the accompanying documents (DD Form 1384). Normally, this document is presented by the plane loadmaster in the case of mail being transported by Air Mobility Command and by the driver of the container truck if the mail is transported by MSC.

If command aircraft and trucks are used for the transport of mail, OPNAV Form 5110/9 should be used to receipt for the mail. You should sign and date the form in the appropriate space provided at the bottom of the form. Retain all copies of OPNAV Form 5110/9 for ordinary mail receipts for 6 months in the post office files, 2 years for manifests listing Registered Mail™.

p. 577

Rev. MAR 2013 22-24 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Air Carrier Irregularities and Reporting Procedures

Mail-handling irregularities are failures by air carriers to comply with USPS regulations concerning the transportation of mail. When air carriers fail to comply with rules and regulations issued by USPS, the carriers are subject to penalty action. Reportable and non reportable irregularities are defined in the DOD Postal Manual, DOD 4525.6-M and in USPS Handbook T-7. The processing procedures for reporting mail-handling irregularities depend upon the type of air carriers involved.

PS Form 2759 for U.S. Commercial Carriers

Air carriers providing mail transportation services have specific responsibilities for the proper handling and care of mail in their custody. Failing to comply with the carriage rules and conditions set by the USPS subject them to penalty action.

When mail is mishandled by an air carrier employee, agent, or representative, Report of Irregular Handling of Mail, PS Form 2759 (Figure 22-10) must be prepared. The PS Form 2759 is primarily used as a management tool for military postal officials, air transportation managers, air carrier officials responsible for the proper handling of mail in air transportation channels.

PS Form 2759 is also used to determine and levy appropriate financial penalties against a U.S. air carrier. The purpose of assessing penalties for mail handling irregularities is to focus the air carrier’s attention to an unsatisfactory condition that requires corrective action. Although foreign-flag air carriers are not subject to financial penalties, a PS Form 2759 must be prepared each time an irregularity occurs.

The following definitions explain categories of mail handling irregularities:

• Failure to load at origin: The failure to load mail tendered at origin on the flight indicated on the routing label and/or dispatch documents. If the amount of mail tendered to a carrier exceeds the lift capacity of the flight for any reason, a PS Form 2759 should be prepared documenting the excess tender. In this situation, the PS Form 2759 should indicate that a penalty assessment is not recommended.

• Delivery to wrong destination: Delivery to a military postal authority at a destination other than that shown on the routing label or dispatch documents.

• Delayed ground delivery: The failure to deliver (after the arrival of the flight) incoming mail to a military postal official within the time allowed, which should not exceed 6 hours.

• Failure to arrive as intended: Delivery to the military postal facility at the correct destination either on the correct flight that arrives later than planned or on a flight other than the flight designated on the dispatch instructions.

• Failure to protect: Failure of a carrier to protect and safeguard mail from inclement weather, loss, depredation, or other hazards while under the custody and control of the carrier. Failure to protect includes: failure to prevent unauthorized persons from having access to the mail; allowing mail to be exposed to adverse weather, such as high winds, rain, sleet, or snow; and failure to transport mail on the ground in carts, containers, or other vehicles securely enclosed to protect the mail from loss or depredation.

p. 578

Rev. MAR 2013 22-25 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

NOTE

Any pouch, tray, or OSP found unattended and out of the control of an air carrier is included in the failure to protect category of mail handling irregularities. This category also includes instances where an air carrier fails to notify the military postal facility of flight delays in excess of 2 hours, flight cancellations, flight diversions, or emergency changes in the schedule of any flight on which mail is transported or has been tendered for transportation by a military postal facility.

• Failure to transfer: Mail not transferred between designated flights of the same carrier or between designated flights of two carriers.

• Missing mail: When the number of pieces of mail delivered to a postal facility is less than the number indicated on the PS Form 2942-A. In this instance, the mail must be assumed to be missing and tracer action initiated. Missing inbound mail will not be reported on PS Form 2759 until the origin dispatching office verifies that the pieces were in fact dispatched and documented properly.

• Missing AV-7: When an air carrier delivers mail to a postal facility or another air carrier for transfer without the required dispatch documents (PS Form 2942-A).

• Prepare PS Form 2759 in an original and two copies. Specific instructions for completing PS Form 2759 are on the reverse side of the form. However, the following serve as reminders when completing the form.

• TYPE OR PRINT LEGIBLY with a ballpoint pen (black ink).

• Check the appropriate box indicating the correct irregularity code corresponding to the specific mishandling reported.

• Provide accurate information in each of the appropriate spaces provided on the form. Include the proper category of mail (e.g., Express, First-Class, Priority, MOM, SAM, PAL) in the “Class” column.

• Include a sufficient explanation to substantiate the type of irregularity noted and fully describe the circumstances involved.

• Show all weights in kilograms.

• Use a separate PS Form 2759 for each reportable irregularity. Each PS Form 2759 will record only one irregularity code.

• The explanation should be specific (who, what, when, where, why, how) in detailing the circumstances which may have had a direct effect on the mishandling. Also include the disposition of the mail.

• The postal supervisor’s signature serves as an indication that the form has been reviewed for completeness and accuracy and the date of the notification is entered in this block.

p. 579

Rev. MAR 2013 22-26 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

• Check the block for lower priority on board when it can be substantiated that freight has been loaded, which displaces mail.

Figure 22-10 — An example of a completed PS Form 2759 for Registered Mail™ dispatch, Report of Irregular Handling Mail.

AIR MOBILITY COMMAND CARRIERS

When mail is transported from the United States to an overseas destination via Air Mobility Command, any irregularity should be reported by naval message to the appropriate Joint Military Postal Activity (JMPA). The message should include a statement reporting the nature of the error, any actions taken to correct the error, recommendations that would prevent recurring errors.

p. 580

Rev. MAR 2013 22-27 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

For errors occurring in dispatches originating in overseas areas, the Commanding Officer of the dispatching activity should be notified by an electrical message for corrective action.

SHIPBOARD AND OVERSEAS MPOS AND FLEET MAIL CENTER OPERATIONS

Aboard ship, at Fleet Mail Centers (FMCs) and Military Post Offices(MPO) your duties as a postal petty officer will involve the actual handling, sorting, and distribution of all incoming mail. If you are aboard ship and are in a United States port of call, you will pick up your mail at the local civilian post office. If your ship is in a foreign port overseas, the mail usually is received through the nearest MPO or FMC. If there is no U.S. military post office in the area, you will receive your mail from a commercial air carrier, military air carrier, local foreign post office, U.S. Embassy or Consulate via a contracted Husbanding Agent.

When your ship is at sea, you may receive mail by Underway Replenishment (UNREP), Carrier onboard delivery (COD), or vertical replenishment (VERTREP). UNREP is the oldest method used to transfer articles from one small ship to another. COD flights bring cargo, mail, passengers to the aircraft carrier. Some of that cargo and mail will be for other ships that are operating with the carrier. The carrier must either use UNREP or VERTREP to transfer cargo, mail, passengers to the other ships. In addition, the ships in company with the carrier send their outgoing mail, cargo and passengers to the carrier so they can be put aboard the COD for further transfer ashore.

Although you will find some of the explanations and procedures in this section to be repetitive, you must look at them in the context of operating within a different environment - shipboard and overseas MPOs.

Military Air Transit Time Information System (MATTIS)

Before sorting and delivering incoming mail, or transferring mail to ships of a battle group, overseas postal activities and ships on deployment must record transit time data by scanning barcoded Global Business System(GBS) labels attached to priority mail pouches containing First-Class letter mail and Outside Pieces (OSPs).. Overseas shore based postal activities must also record data from barcoded labels attached to Express Mail® articles addressed for delivery to overseas shore installations.

Military Air Transit Time Information Systems (MATTIS) is the system used to measure transit times. Postal clerks use the system, which consists of handheld computers and laser scanners to scan the barcoded labels. When the scanning has been completed for the day, the scanned bar-code data is transmitted via AMPS.

The purposes of collecting transit time data are to accomplish the following:

• Measure USPS, air carriers, Department of Defense (DOD) performance in the movement of military mail

• Monitor mail movement

• Assess transit times

• Identify the inefficient or misrouting of mail

• Make recommendations to mail routing authorities to correct mail movement problems or errors.

p. 581

Rev. MAR 2013 22-28 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

MATTIS scanning is required each time mail is received, whether the mail is for your command or is mail you have received for further transfer. Before scanning mail, verify the set-up data is correct and ensure the laser scanner is not pointed in a way that would do harm to your eyes or the eyes of other personnel in the post office.

Military postal clerks assigned to ships receive MATTIS training by the appropriate Fleet Postal Advisor before deployment. This training consists of how to correctly scan mail, download the data, and transmit it to AMPS. At overseas postal activities, the Postal Officer is responsible for providing the training.

The command postal officer is responsible for ensuring the USPS scanning equipment is accounted for on PS Form 1590, maintained in operating condition, and safeguarded. If the equipment becomes damaged, the Postal Officer must investigate the reason for the damage and report the circumstances to the fleet postal advisor. As the person using the equipment on a daily basis, you must keep the Postal Officer informed at all times of the status of the scanning equipment and report any problems to him or her so corrective action can be taken. It may also be necessary to return equipment for repair or replacement.

The Postal Officer should also review the daily dispatch report generated from the data submitted to AMPS. Review of this report may identify discrepancies in routing of mail, which will be reported to the appropriate mail routing authority so corrective action can be taken. As the postal expert for your command, you should become knowledgeable of all aspects of the MATTIS system. Your command Postal Officer will rely on you to ensure the success of the program.

Delivery of Incoming Mail

Now that you have scanned the GBS bar-coded labels on incoming mail, you are ready to process the mail for final delivery.

Incoming mail may be sorted and delivered by departments, divisions,/or by general delivery. Your ship or overseas station’s personnel complement will determine the number of separations required for incoming mail.

Arrange the letter case to permit rapid sorting of the mail. When compartments of the letter case are assigned, reserve those that are easily accessible for departments or divisions that receive the largest volume of mail.

General Delivery Service

MPOs that deliver mail through receptacles must use general delivery service for TDY and newly assigned personnel until a permanent resident address is established, permanently assigned personnel when receptacles are not available.

At overseas locations, family members may be provided general delivery service when they are separated from their sponsor because of a military situation. At overseas locations, where mail receptacles are not used for the delivery of personal mail, retirees authorized MPO privileges may also receive mail through the general delivery system, subject to base or Status of Forces Agreements (SOFA.)

Sorting Mail

As you sort mail, open and sort the contents of pouches, sacks, or trays one at a time. You should remove slide labels from incoming mail pouches, sacks, and trays. Set them aside until you finish

p. 582

Rev. MAR 2013 22-29 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

sorting the mail from that particular pouch, sack or tray in the event discrepancies are noted. If you do not discover any discrepancies, you can destroy the labels. The following guidelines also apply:

• Set aside all Express, Certified, Insured Mail™ over $200 to prepare PS Form 3849.

NOTE

Express Mail® can only be received at selected overseas shore based activities. Refer to USPS Postal Bulletin

• Postmark all missent letters and flats with the date of receipt on the back of the article and endorse “Missent to FPO xxxxx-xxxx”. Postmark missent parcels and publications on the address side then forward to the correct address with the next outgoing dispatch.

• When a piece of mail reaches your office without postage fully prepaid at the time of mailing, you must deliver the piece without collecting the postage-due. This includes any deficient postage on a piece for which special services have been requested.

• If Registered Mail™ is received in ordinary mail, follow the guidelines discussed in Chapter 7.

• Mail received for delivery to individuals or activities not authorized MPO privileges will be returned to the sender endorsed "ADDRESSEE NOT AUTHORIZED MPO PRIVILEGES".

Sorting Incoming Parcels

When you sort parcels, be sure you separate the Insured Over $200 parcels from the ordinary and insured parcels $200 and under. Insured parcels $200 and under are treated as ordinary mail and should be delivered as ordinary mail.

DELIVERY OF ACCOUNTABLE MAIL

Personal accountable mail should be delivered by the MPO to the addressee or an authorized agent. Delivery is completed by preparing PS Form 3849 in the same manner discussed earlier in this chapter.

Official accountable mail addressed to the Commanding Officer, Supply Officer, so forth, should be receipted for on a PS Form 3883. The articles should then be delivered directly to a unit mail clerk, or mail orderly authorized on DD Form 285.

Disposition of Damaged Mail

All damaged mail, should be endorsed "RECEIVED IN DAMAGED CONDITION". Mail matter damaged in a catastrophe should be repaired and a letter of explanation outlining the circumstances that led to the damage must be enclosed in each repaired article, the article forwarded under priority USPS indicia to the addressee.

Articles Found Loose in the Mails

You will occasionally find stamps, money, or other articles loose in a mail pouch. You should make every effort to match loose articles with the mailing container(s) from which they were lost. When an article of value cannot be matched with an addressed envelope or wrapper, examine the article to try

p. 583

Rev. MAR 2013 22-30 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

to determine the sender. If you can determine the sender, return the article in a USPS official indicia envelope or in another container with a USPS label affixed. Enclose a letter of explanation. For articles that cannot be matched with wrappers and/or ownership cannot be established, then the following handling procedures apply:

• Articles of minor value, such as pens, pencils, stationery, should be given to the chaplain or other official designated by the Commanding Officer for disposition

• Articles such as food, drugs, tobacco products, toothpaste, cosmetics and articles contained in parcels with the mailer’s instructions to abandon if undeliverable should be destroyed in the presence of a witness

• Articles of obvious value (including money) should be forwarded by registered USPS indicia mail to the appropriate Mail Recovery Center (MRC).

Uncanceled Stamps Found Loose in Mail

Every effort should be made to reaffix loose stamps to the mail if possible; if not, they should be destroyed by a military postal supervisor.

Irregularities

As you process mail, watch for irregularities in the makeup and dispatch made by other military post offices or the USPS. If irregularities (discrepancies) are discovered, an irregularity report must be completed. Irregularities may include, but are not limited to these items:

• Missent mail

• Improper tag or label

• Improper slide label

• Mail discovered in empty equipment

• Mail dispatched in defective equipment

• Mail transported in wrong Mail Transport Equipment (MTE) for its class.

Report mail irregularities by preparing an Irregularities in Makeup and Dispatch of Mail, DD Form 2273. When reporting irregularities, the postal clerk will remove the slide label from the sack, pouch or tray involved and attach it to the DD Form 2273 (Figure 22-11). This will assist in isolating errors and speeding up corrective action.

p. 584

Rev. MAR 2013 22-31 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-11 — Example of an Irregularities in Makeup and Dispatch of Mail, DD Form 2273.

Prepare DD Form 2273 in an original and two copies, distribute it as follows: If irregularities are between MPOs, use this procedure:

1. Send the original to the appropriate Postal Commander or Postal Officer. [Attach the slide label, facing slip (if any), and tag to the report.]

2. Send one copy to your Regional Mail Manager.

3. Retain one copy for your MPO file.

If USPS errors are noted, do the following:

1. Send the original (with the slide label, facing slip (if any), tag (attached to the report) to the appropriate Joint Military Postal Activity (JMPA).

2. APO/FPO 09XXX and 34XXX addresses should be sent to: Commander, JMPA-Atlantic.

3. APO/FPO 96XXX addresses should send to: Commander, Joint Military Postal Activity-Pacific.

4. Send one copy to your Regional Mail Manager.

5. Retain one copy for your MPO file.

p. 585

Rev. MAR 2013 22-32 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

TREATMENT OF INCOMING INTERNATIONAL MAIL

The delivery of international accountable mail received in your office is treated and delivered as ordinary mail. This section will help you identify special service endorsements on incoming international mail.

Insured Parcels

In determining whether a parcel is insured, one of the following insurance endorsements must appear on the parcel according to the language of the country of origin:

• INSURED

• ASEGURADO or VALOR DECLARADO

• ASSICURATO or VALOR DICHIARATO

• VALEUR DECLAREE or VD

• WERTANGABE or WERTPAKET

A number on a parcel is not sufficient evidence of insurance. An insurance label is required to indicate that the article is insured. You should deliver international insured parcels in the same manner as domestic Insured Over $200 parcels.

Return Receipts

Return receipts from other countries bear the words "AVIS DE RECEPCION" or the letters "AR". When your office receives international mail with a return receipt attached you should follow this process:

1. Request the addressee or authorized agent date and sign the receipt in INK. When signed by an agent of the addressee, have the agent sign the addressee’s name, followed by the agent’s own signature.

2. Postmark the receipt in the appropriate spaces on both sides.

3. Endorse the completed receipt AIRMAIL and dispatch in the next outgoing mail.

When incoming registered or Insured Mail™ is m arked AR or bears the notation AVIS DE RECEPCION but is not accompanied by a return receipt, the delivery office must complete and attach a Return Receipt for International Mail, PS Form 2865.

MAIL LOGS AND EQUIPMENT

The maintenance of postal records and logs is a very important phase in the operation of any post office. These records are necessary to determine the adequacy of mail service and to assist in cases of complaints or investigations. They must be readily available during postal inspections.

Incoming and Outgoing Mail Logs

A record of all incoming and outgoing mail received at and dispatched from your post office should be kept on file. The standard Navy record logbook with columns for appropriate entries is the easiest log to maintain and should be retained for 6 months after the last entry for ordinary mail. If you compile receipt and dispatch information daily, you will have a record of the weight and classes of mail handled by your MPO.

p. 586

Rev. MAR 2013 22-33 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Mail Transport Equipment (MTE)

MTE is any sack, pouch, letter or flat tray, etc., that is used for the transport of U.S. mail. The amount of mail received and dispatched by your post office determines the frequency of return dispatches of serviceable MTE. Any serviceable sack, pouch or tray is considered excess equipment unless actually needed for the dispatch of mail. Do not stockpile MTE for possible emergencies. Return excess MTE to the closes Fleet Mail Center for consolidation.

OUTGOING MAIL

Now we will cover procedures for the processing and makeup of outgoing mail at all MPOs. The processing and makeup of mail is the first and most important step in the mail delivery cycle. This phase of operation involves the following:

• Collecting, Facing, Postmarking, Sorting, Pouching, Traying and Labeling.

• By following the proper procedure for the above tasks, you will prevent unnecessary delay of the mail.

FACILITIES FOR MAIL DEPOSIT

If at all possible, you should not require persons to bring outgoing letter mail to the post office. Aboard ship, collection box/es should be installed in a location convenient for crewmembers. At shore activities, street-type collection boxes are placed in high-traffic areas that are easily accessible to the greatest number of personnel. One box should be placed outside, in front of the post office. Other boxes may be placed in housing areas, near the galley, Bachelor Officer Quarters (BOQs) and Bachelor Enlisted Quarters (BEQs), exchange facility, and so on.

In addition to collection boxes, you should have a letter drop inside the post office. It should be located in a convenient place for your customers and for you when sorting, canceling and casing mail. The mail drop should made in such a way as to protect the mail and prevent it from being taken back out through the slot.

Mail Collection Box Schedules

A schedule for mail collections should be displayed on all collection boxes using Hours of Collection card, USPS Item D1175B, or USPS Label 55. D1175B and Label 55 can be ordered through the USPS Material Distribution Center (MDC) Topeka, KS.

You should also provide information concerning the location of a collection box with a later collection time. Specify any weekend or holiday exceptions to the regular processing and dispatch schedules. Overseas activities and deployed ships should schedule a pickup from collection boxes seven days a week if transportation for onward dispatch is available.

POSTAGE PAYMENT

Postage on all mail must be fully prepaid at the time it is deposited in the post office or a collection box, except for the following types of mail:

• Business Reply Mail

• Certain matter by or for the blind or handicapped

• Official Mail (never deposit in a Mail Collection Box).

p. 587

Rev. MAR 2013 22-34 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

• Mail sent by members of the Armed Forces as free

• Keys and identification cards being returned to owners

Mail with Insufficient Postage

If domestic mail is deposited at your post office or in collection boxes without enough to fully cover the required amount, take the following steps:

1. Endorse the article with the rubber stamp POSTAGE DUE and enter the amount due.

2. Process the article for dispatch with other mail.

Once the article reaches the office of delivery, it will be delivered to the addressee upon payment of the postage due.

If an article is addressed to a foreign country and the article does not have enough postage or any postage attached, take the following steps:

• Return the article to the mailer endorsed with the rubber-stamp "RETURNED FOR ADDITIONAL POSTAGE."

NOTE

When re-mailing, cross out this notice or paste stamps over it.

On short paid international mail endorse letters, letter packages, postcards POSTAGE DUE Cents, if they do not bear a return address, but do not indicate the amount due. Then forward the article(s) to the international exchange office. Handle all other categories of unpaid or short paid mail in accordance with the IMM.

On short paid international registered articles found with ordinary mail, return the article to the sender after indicating that it is short paid and must be presented for registration at the post office. If the short paid registered article does not bear a return address, cross out the sender’s registry endorsement and dispatch as ordinary mail.

If the mailer has indicated on a domestic article that a special service is desired and the special service fee is not included in the postage, the article will also be endorsed for the amount of the postage due for the fee, with the exception of Registered Mail™ and Express Mail®. The article must also be endorsed with the service indicated, to ensure the piece of mail is given the service desired by the mailer.

• If short paid Registered Mail™ is found in ordinary mail, with only the First-Class rate of postage paid, the piece is delivered to the addressee as ordinary First-Class Mail. If the amount of postage and fees affixed indicate that the piece was intended to be registered, the piece is rated postage due and forwarded to the addressee as Registered Mail™.

• For an Express Mail® article that does not bear enough postage, the mailer must be contacted to correct the deficiency before dispatch. Express Mail® articles without sufficient postage will never be endorsed, “Postage Due” and collection of deficient postage is never attempted from the addressee.

p. 588

Rev. MAR 2013 22-35 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Mail without Postage

Mail found in collection boxes without any postage affixed should be returned to the mailer. This mail will be endorsed with the stamp "RETURNED FOR POSTAGE". If the article does not have a return address, or the delivery and return address are the same, treat the article as dead mail and forward to the serving Mail Recovery Center(MRC).

Unauthorized Mailers

If mail is found in one of your collection boxes bearing a return address of a person, firm, or activity not authorized MPO privileges, regardless of whether or not the article has postage fully prepaid, you should do the following:

1. Endorse the article SENDER NOT AUTHORIZED MPO PRIVILEGES.

2. Return the article to the mailer.

Business Reply Mail

Business reply mail enables firms and businesses to receive mail back from individuals without prepayment of postage. The firm or business provides specially printed preaddressed envelopes or cards to individuals from whom a reply is desired. Business reply permits are obtained from the USPS. MPOs are not authorized to issue business reply permits. You will most likely find business reply letters in your collection boxes. This type of mail is identified by the following endorsements:

• NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES, preprinted in the upper- right corner of the face of the envelope. BUSINESS REPLY MAIL, appearing above the address.

• FIRST-CLASS MAIL, PERMIT NO., followed by the permit number and the name of the issuing post office (city and state) appearing below the Business Reply Mail legend.

• POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE, appearing above the address.

This type of domestic mail is accepted at MPOs without prepayment of postage. Business reply mail having international addresses is available only to certain countries participating in this service (refer to the International Mail Manager (IMM) for participating countries and other requirements).

Free Mail

Under certain conditions members of the U.S. Armed Forces may send mail free. The free mailing privilege applies when the members are serving in combat areas specifically designated. When in force, the free mailing privilege applies equally to persons no longer in a combat area but, due to a wound, disease, or other injury incident to service in the designated combat area, are hospitalized in any Armed Forces or Veterans’ Administration (VA) medical center.

Types of Mail That May Be Sent Free

Letter mail, postcards, recorded communications (sound or video) having the character of personal correspondence weighing less than 13 ounces may be sent free. When this type of mail is sent, the mailer must write or print the word FREE in the upper-right corner where the postage would normally be placed. The mail must bear a complete return address.

p. 589

Rev. MAR 2013 22-36 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Mobile Units That Do Not Have Post Offices

Ships and other mobile units that do not have post offices may also dispatch free mail that originated in a designated combat area:

• All mail must be endorsed FREE.

• The mail must be bundled separately from mail with postage stamps.

• Each bundle of mail must bear a facing slip endorsed CERTIFIED TO BE FREE MAIL ORIGINATING IN A COMBAT ZONE. The mail clerk or mail orderly must sign the facing slip.

International Mail Sent Free

Some items of foreign origin do not bear postage stamps, but instead are marked POSTAGE PAID, ON POSTAL SERVICE, SERVICE DES POSTES, TAXE PERCUE or TP, or PORT PAYEE or PP followed by postmark. The marking ON HER MAJESTY’S SERVICE or H.M.S. is also sometimes used. Treat this mail as prepaid.

Official Mail

Official mail must not be deposited in mail collection boxes. Mail clerks or mail orderlies from the office responsible for applying postage to official mail should be instructed to bring official mail to the post office. Official mail found in mail collection boxes should be turned over to the command official mail manager or the office that controls official mail.

Intratheater Delivery Service

The Intratheater Delivery Service (IDS) system permits all eligible patrons of the Military Postal Service (MPS) to send articles to other MPOs located within the same geographical area at no cost to the mailer. The USPS has indicated that, by definition, IDS material is not to be regarded as MAIL, it is PERSONAL CORRESPONDENCE. Therefore, any references to FREE MAIL are inappropriate. Distinction must be maintained to protect the status of the program. Inform your postal patrons that Intra-theater Delivery Service (IDS) items sent free of postage must originate at a Fleet Post Office (FPO) or an Army or Air Force Post Office (APO). IDS articles should be processed and dispatched along with military working and foreign mail and endorsed “MPS” in the upper right corner where postage would be placed. The size limit is 108 inches and length + girth and 70 pounds or less.

With respect to forwarding service, IDS items that do not bear postage and therefore may not be forwarded for individuals who have been reassigned to the United States or outside of an overseas geographical area (for example, from Atlantic to Pacific). Such items must be returned to the sender. However, items that qualify for the forwarding service (individuals who have changed addresses within the same geographical area) shall be forwarded.

Undeliverable items must be returned to the sender if a return address is available. Items without postage that cannot be delivered or returned to sender should be sent to the designated military dead letter office within 48 hours of receipt. This does not apply to personnel on leave, TDY, or known prospective gains; their mail should be held until they return or report onboard.

Items of value, including cash, must be turned over to a service welfare or charitable organization. Dead letter items without postage must not be forwarded to the USPS. All privileges, requirements, priorities applicable to items in the Military Postal Service (MPS) apply to IDS. This includes protection and security against theft and depredation, adherence to service standards, protection from unauthorized search and seizure procedures, compliance with customs requirements. However,

p. 590

Rev. MAR 2013 22-37 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

no claims will be honored by the USPS or MPS for the loss, miscarriage, or negligent transmission of personal correspondence sent without postage.

PREPARATION OF MAIL FOR DISPATCH

Before you can process mail for dispatch, you will need certain mail-handling equipment. As a minimum, you should have the following equipment on hand:

• Scales

• Rubber stamps for endorsements

• Rubber bands

• Canceling devices

• Distribution case(s)

• Nonstandard facing slips

• Pouches and letter trays

• Large labels

• Strip labels

Collection of Mail

The first step in processing outgoing mail is the collection of raw (uncanceled) mail. Collection of mail from mailboxes must be made in accordance with the collection schedules you have posted on the boxes and must be collected NLT 20 minutes from the posted time. Collection times must be set up to meet dispatch and transportation schedules to prevent delay of mail. To be comparable with USPS dispatch standards, MPOs overseas and aboard deployed units should schedule pickups from collection boxes seven days a week if transportation for onward dispatch is available. Aboard ship, collection of mail should be made often, so when unscheduled transportation becomes available your mail is ready to go.

Facing the Mail

If the amount of mail warrants, separate the long and short envelopes. After this has been completed, face the letters by placing each with the address side up and the stamps pointing to the right. While you are facing the mail, check each piece for proper postage, correct address and endorsements. Your office should have a scale to rate single piece mail along with the required rubber hand stamps used for marking short-paid mail.

Sometimes a mailer in a hurry will not include some portion of the address that is required before the article can be delivered. Return these articles to the mailer promptly so as not to delay them longer than necessary.

POSTMARKING AND CANCELING MAIL

After all the letters have been faced, it is time to postmark and cancel the stamps. Before postmarking mail, check the hand canceller or postmarking die to ensure the current date is inserted. All mail must be postmarked with the date of mailing.

p. 591

Rev. MAR 2013 22-38 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

The backdating of the postmark on mail is expressly forbidden, except when a specific written authorization is granted to provide philatelic treatment on a new stamp issue beyond the issuance date. Such authority is extended only when public demand for a specific first-day issue exceeds daily cancellation capabilities. Never backdate mail even for a friend.

POSTMARKING EQUIPMENT

The USPS furnishes all canceling machine dies, hand postmarking and canceling equipment. Canceling machine dies and postmarking stamps must contain the legend U.S. Navy and the FPO number or name of the ship and hull number as applicable as well as the month, day and year. Rubber stamps may be obtained from USPS utilizing Requisition for Rubber and Steel Hand Canceling Stamps, PS Form 1567. Only USPS-supplied black ink is to be used for canceling and postmarking purposes.

Applying the Postmark

If you are on a large ship or at a shore activity, you may have a canceling machine. However, most ships and small commands use the hand canceller because the volume of outgoing mail does not warrant the use of a canceling machine. Do not postmark over the stamp(s). If more than one stamp has been used, cancel the stamp farthest to the left and those to the right of it with the tips of the canceling bars. Cancel the last stamp to the left with the postmark and canceling bars, ensure that the postmark does not hit the stamp (Figure 22-12). The date of mailing (month, day and year) must be included in all postmarking devices when postmarking and canceling mail.

NOTE

DO not use the a.m. or p.m. indicator with any postmarking device.

Figure 22-12 — Examples of canceled stamps by hand device.

p. 592

Rev. MAR 2013 22-39 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Philatelic Cancellations

Occasionally you will receive a request from collectors to apply a postmark on certain stamped cards and envelopes. It is in the best interest of the Navy to provide this service to philatelists because of the public relations value. A philatelist is a person who collects and/or studies postage stamps. Philatelic service must be carried out within the resources of your post office and should not be provided if it interferes with regular business. The USPS will release information concerning new stamps and special events well in advance to provide philatelists sufficient time to submit covers (a cover is an envelope on which all the postal markings or cancellations have been applied). When such requests are received, you must do the following:

• Ensure that the canceling machine or hand stamp is cleaned and serviced before postmarking the covers

• Furnish a clear and legible postmark

• Avoid canceling stamps by pen or illegible smudging

• Postmark all stamps with black ink

• Limit postmarking to five covers from each collector

• Ensure that philatelic covers are not over canceled, backstamped, or otherwise defaced on the front or back

• Avoid using a philatelic cover as a top piece in a bundle for destination-package labeling purposes

• Avoid bending, folding, mutilating, or damaging the cover by rubber bands.

Applying Cachets

Occasionally you may be provided a rubber stamp cachet to apply to philatelic covers when a special event occurs. A cachet is a design or inscription applied to a cover to commemorate a postal or special event. Also, most ships have their own unique cachet. When a cachet is provided, place the imprint in the lower-left corner of the envelope or the location indicated by the mailer. Do not cover any portion of the address.

To protect the interest of philatelists and the authenticity of their collections, the cachet stamp for the special event should be destroyed immediately after all eligible covers have been processed. In any case, the cachet stamp must be destroyed no later than midnight of the day of the event being commemorated.

Returning Covers

Covers must be returned to the mailer, without a postmark or cachet applied, with a letter of explanation if the following occurs:

• More than five covers are received from any one collector

• The covers were received after the established deadline for providing postmarks

• The covers bear insufficient or foreign postage.

If International Reply Coupons (IRCs) are included, process according to the IMM.

p. 593

Rev. MAR 2013 22-40 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Mail Sorting

The USPS at CONUS gateways process all military letter mail through Delivery Bar Code Sorters (DBCSs) and flat mail through Flat Sorting Machines (FSMs). Therefore, CONUS-destined letters need only be faced, canceled, placed in mail trays or secured with rubber bands, placed in orange Priority Mail No. 1 pouches. Pouches are to be labeled according to local FMC instructions. These pouches should be dispatched to the serving USPS facility or to the nearest FMC or MPO for further transfer. Ships should dispatch mail directly to the appropriate gateway only when they are operating in an area not served by an FMC or an Aerial Mail Terminal (AMT).

Bundling Mail

After letters and flats have been cased (sorted), you are then ready to bundle the mail for dispatch (or place into mail trays, which will be discussed later in this chapter).

To ensure letters and flats remain intact and do not lose their identity during transportation, they must be properly secured before being placed in mail pouches (Figure 22-13). Bundles should be made as large as one hand can conveniently hold, approximately 4 inches thick.

Secure all letter bundles with 1/4-inch rubber bands (PS Item 0385E). Bundles up to 1 inch in thickness should be secured with one rubber band around the girth. Bundles between 1 and 4 inches in thickness must be secured with two rubber bands, the first secured around the length and the second secured around the girth. On the top of each bundle, place a nonstandard facing slip to identify the contents.

International Letters

Make up international mail in direct bundles for cities or countries when volume warrants. When volume is insufficient to warrant direct bundles, make a mixed foreign bundle. Identify these bundles by a nonstandard facing slip endorsed MIXED FOREIGN. Send this mail to the serving FMC for further dispatch.

Military Working Mail

Mail addressed to an FPO or APO address should be bundled separately from other mail. Bundles for FPOs and APOs and other mail not to be returned to Continental United States (CONUS) (for example, Guam and Hawaii when in WestPac) should be identified by a nonstandard facing slip labeled Military Working (Figure 22-14), placed on top of the bundle of letters. Send this mail to the serving FMC for further dispatch.

Letter Trays

Letter trays are used as a means to dispatch large volumes of letter mail. Letter trays should be used by your command if volume of letter mail warrants. If not, then use Priority Mail No.1 pouches as your dispatching equipment.

Full-sized letter trays hold an average of 600 letters (average full tray weight is 8 kilos, 17.5 pounds), half -sized letter trays hold an average of 200 letters and should always be filled to maximum capacity, when possible, but no less than 75 percent. When full-sized letter trays are less than 75 percent filled, place the mail in half-sized letter trays.

If the volume of letter mail does not warrant using letter trays, prepare letter mail in bundles as discussed earlier and place in Priority Mail No. 1 pouches labeled to the serving USPS CONUS gateway or FMC as your area mail coordinator so designates.

p. 594

Rev. MAR 2013 22-41 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

After the tray is filled, it should be inserted into a sleeve and secured by a strap. The adhesive-backed label holder should be attached to the top-left corner of the tray. Most large shipboard commands use MM trays.

When using Managed Mail (MM) trays, treat the cardboard trays like any other piece of USPS equipment. Mail trays cost money and are intended to be used 20 times each; however, when a tray appears weak you may discard it.

Flat Mail Trays

The USPS also uses large trays to dispatch flats. Flat trays containing First-Class Mail are identified by the green side of the cover faced outward. Overseas Navy post offices and larger ships, such as aircraft carriers, should use flat trays if volume of First-Class flats warrant.

Figure 22-13 — Bundling letter mail.

p. 595

Rev. MAR 2013 22-42 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

POUCHING Figure 22-14 — A Bundle of mixed military working letters.

Pouches are containers made of sewn nylon, cotton, or polyester or plastic with an opening at one end. Pouches have a leatherneck or Velcro strap near the opening.

Sacks are containers made of sewn fabric, usually nylon, polyester, canvas, or plastic, with an opening on one end. A cord or drawstring is threaded through the metal grommets or opening in the fabric.

Majority of mail received at military post offices is contained in pouches. When dispatching mail, MPOs normally only use pouches, so for purposes of this section, all references are to dispatching mail in pouches. Plastic liners are required for all mail dispatched in a pouch or sack.

All mail will be pouched or trayed, by classification and service, considering priorities and transportation policies. MPOs dispatching mail will follow the guidelines established by USPS in the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM), Postal Operations Manual (POM), USPS HDBK T-7, USPS PUB 52 regarding proper pouching of mail. Additionally, all MPOs will use the following general guidelines when pouching mail:

• Dispatching agencies must not commingle priority, First-Class Mail, free mail with other classes of mail without prior approval of the serving JMPA.

• Items that could damage mailbags or other mail must not be pouched but must be dispatched as OSPs; sometimes referred to as Outside Mail (OSM). OSPs are parcels that because of size, shape, density, weight, container, or contents cannot be placed in mail pouches.

Hazardous Material

Hazardous materials may be mailed when they meet criteria established by USPS. Special wrapping and packaging rules apply and hazardous material must be prepared for mailing, marked, or tagged according to the instructions contained in the DMM and USPS PUB 52. If all conditions of the DMM

p. 596

Rev. MAR 2013 22-43 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

and PUB 52 are met, hazardous material accepted for mailing will be pouched separately from all other mail.

Mail for Military Addresses

Mail addressed to an FPO or APO address must be bundled separately from other mail and labeled MILITARY WORKING. These packages and other mail similarly addressed should be placed in pouches, endorsed MILITARY WORKING, dispatched to the nearest FMC or MPO.

Pouches and bundles of military working mail received at FMCs or MPOs must be reworked and dispatched according to instructions from the Area Mail Coordinator (AMC) through channels that will ensure expeditious delivery.

Parcels

Parcels accepted over the counter at finance windows or received from other sources are taken to the dispatch section and processed. Depending on the size, parcels are either enclosed in pouches or processed as outside pieces. Dispatch clerks must pouch parcels whenever possible to reduce the handling of mail.

Outside Pieces/Outside Mail (OSP/OSM)

Parcels that require handling outside of mailbags are those that because of their size, weight, nature, or contents cannot be enclosed inside sacks without damaging them or other mail. The fact that a parcel is priority mail, sent as special handling, or contains perishable items does not in, of itself justify outside dispatch.

A parcel is considered as an OSP/OSM if it exceeds any of the following factors:

• Size—Elo ngated parcels over 34 inches in length or over 17 inches in width

• Weight—P arcels weighing over 35 pounds

• Heavy Density—S mall parcels of very heavy density, such as metal tools, castings, machine parts, weighing over 15 pounds, which are likely to cause damage to other sacked parcels.

Also, metal containers of all shapes and sizes should be dispatched as OSPs/OSMs.

Dispatching Outside Pieces/Mail

When your ship is in a foreign port of call where commercial U.S. air carrier service is not available, you should use available military aircraft to dispatch OSPs/OSMs. Do not dispatch OSP/OSM to foreign air carriers. Retain all OSPs/OSMs until the opportunity becomes available to dispatch them to an FMC or other MPO, unless directed otherwise by the AMC. You must remember that only closed mail may be dispatched through foreign postal channels or by foreign air carriers. Closed mail is mail enclosed inside a U.S. mail pouch, secured with an anti-pilferage seal.

Care in Pouching

Pouching requires care, not only in distribution and routing, but also in handling.

When operating overseas you will be handling large volumes of mail. Some of the mail will be parcels. Since you will be the initial carrier of the parcels you accept at your post office, make sure you do not pack more parcels in a pouch than is convenient to carry. The USPS has a set of specific

p. 597

Rev. MAR 2013 22-44 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

rules on care in pouching, not only to protect the mail but also to protect the personnel handling the mail.

Universal white colored pouches are limited to 70 pounds. Pouches containing letter mail must not exceed 50 pounds.

If you do have to use Universal sacks to dispatch mail, do not place more than 70 pounds of mail in them.

You should allow sufficient space to permit complete closure of the pouch or sack.

When individuals mailing a package request insurance, they are, in reality, asking for additional protection from breakage or loss. It is your duty to see that packages receive the protection that they deserve.

Do not force bulky parcels marked FRAGILE into a pouch. You eliminate any possible extra care that could be given. Large bulky parcels should be treated as OSPs and handled accordingly. Small packages carrying the endorsement FRAGILE should be placed on top of heavier parcels in the pouch to prevent them from being crushed.

Labeling Pouches

After all mail has been properly placed in pouches, the next step of dispatch is to label them. Since slide labels identify the end destination for mail contained in the pouch, extreme care must be taken to correctly label all mail before dispatch.

You should have preprinted labels on hand for the destinations to which you dispatch mail. All labels used by MPO dispatching activities should be white in color. There are two sizes of labels—lar ge labels, for pouches with large label holders, small labels (strip) for pouches with small label holders and canvas sacks. These labels are often referred to as slide labels. Slide labels must be ordered using Requisition for Facing Slips or Labels, PS Form 1578-B following guidance in USPS HBK PO-423 Requisitioning Labels.

Navy post offices should always maintain a requisite amount of preprinted labels on hand. If, for some unexpected reason the stock of labels is depleted, clerks must prepare their own. To prepare labels refer to the DMM. The first line of the label should indicate the destination; the second line identifies the contents of the pouch and the weight in kilograms (Figure 22-15) for converting pounds to kilograms). The third line must identify the office of origin which is the military post office preparing the pouch for dispatch. The slide label should be dated on the reverse side with the All Purpose Date Stamp (APDS) and initialed by the clerk closing the pouch.

See Table 22-7 for examples of slide labels used by overseas postal activities in Europe to dispatch the different classes and types of mail to CONUS gateways. The gateways that overseas MPOs dispatch mail to vary by location. Most Navy ships on deployment dispatch all their outgoing mail to either Los Angeles or New York depending on their area of operation. Annotate the weight on the front of the label and date stamp the back with the APDS and initial, you must use the correct preprinted label indicating the destination, type of mail, weight, office of dispatch.

It is possible for the AMC or in some cases the aircraft carrier your ship may be in company with, to provide instructions for you to send outgoing mail via pouch directly to them for consolidation and onward dispatch. Inform your Postal Officer of dispatches to avoid any confusion and delays.

p. 598

Rev. MAR 2013 22-45 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-15 — A kilograms and pounds conversion chart.

p. 599

Rev. MAR 2013 22-46 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Table 22-1 — Examples of preprinted slide labels

p. 600

Rev. MAR 2013 22-47 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Table 22-1 — Examples of preprinted slide labels (Continued)

p. 601

Rev. MAR 2013 22-48 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Table 22-1 — Examples of preprinted slide labels (Continued)

p. 602

Rev. MAR 2013 22-49 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Table 22-1 — Examples of preprinted slide labels (Continued)

p. 603

Rev. MAR 2013 22-50 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Table 22-1 — Examples of preprinted slide labels (Continued)

AIRPORT-CODED TAGS (FLIGHT TAGS) AND SELF-ADHESIVE LABELS

Slide labels, flight tags and self-adhesive labels are the only external identifiers of end destinations for mail. Therefore, extreme care must be taken to use the correct slide labels in pouches and letter trays, correct flight tags on pouches, the correct self-adhesive labels on letter trays and OSPs before manifesting mail (Figure 22-16).

The instructions for the proper method of completing tags and labels may be found in USPS HDBK T-7. From the time mail is dispatched to its arrival at the airport of final destination, tags provide information to the air carrier on routing for mail pouches. Self-adhesive labels serve the same purpose for letter trays and OSPs.

Once mail is pouched and properly labeled identifying the destination, contents, weight, office of origin, affix the proper airport-coded tag to the pouches. For OSPs and letter trays, attach airport-coded self-adhesive labels.

p. 604

Rev. MAR 2013 22-51 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

Figure 22-16 — A flight tag and label used to identify the destination of mail.

You should be careful in selecting and preparing flight tags to avoid mail being misrouted by the air carrier. Always verify the flight tag and slide labels have the same final airport destination.

When preprinted airport-coded flight tags and self-adhesive labels are not available, prepare the appropriate tags and labels by printing the three-letter city of destination code in the appropriate portion of PS Tag 135-B and PS Label 136-B.

For information on ordering USPS tags and labels, refer to Chapter 12. Pouches, letter trays, OSPs with an airport-coded tag or self-adhesive label attached should have the weight shown in kilograms in the weight block on the tag or label and the flight information when known.

When using self-adhesive labels to identify the proper airport of destination on OSPs, affix these labels to the left of the address so other required markings are not obliterated.

Do not dispatch OSPs if a foreign airline is used unless authorized by the Area Mail Control Activity.

DISPATCHING MAIL AT FLEET MAIL CENTERS

Fleet Mail Centers (FMCs) receive, sort, store (when necessary), consolidate and dispatch mail received from or addressed to all post offices served. FMCs also route outgoing and incoming mail received at the FMC addressed to or from fleet units. The FMC will handle a certain amount of raw mail for dispatch, but the greater amount of mail handled will be from mobile units for further transfer to destination in the United States.

The FMC consolidates outgoing mail by sorting, pouching, and traying the different classes of mail received from various local activities and from some small mobile units. This method reduces the number of pouches, or trays for one destination and allows for a more expeditious mail delivery system. Each FMC is responsible for pouching mail and preparing it for dispatch as far ahead in the domestic postal system as possible.

p. 605

Rev. MAR 2013 22-52 LS: Chapter 22— Mail Handling and Transportation

(This page was left blank intentionally).

p. 606

Rev. MAR 2013 23-1

CHAPTER 23

CLAIMS AND INQUIRIES

In addition to regular postal duties, a Military Postal Clerk (MPC) will be confronted frequently with postal concerns of the public. A concern may take the form of a claim, an inquiry, or a complaint. This chapter provides helpful information concerning these concerns and issues, including postal instructions governing the procedures to follow in handling claims, inquiries, complaints and preparation of the applicable forms.

The U.S. Postal Service (USPS) understands it is difficult to compensate a patron for the loss of sentimental or irreplaceable items, is always trying to improve the way mail is handled to prevent further loss and customer dissatisfaction. Each customer is encouraged to report instances of loss, rifling and other mistreatment of mail, even if there are no provisions for payment of indemnity.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Differentiate between inquiries and complaints and the forms required to respond to each.

2. Identify the procedures for processing customer inquiries and complaints

3. Recall the procedures for processing indemnity claims.

4. Determine the requirements for initiating an Inquiry and processing a Claim for Indemnity for International Registered, Insured, and Express Mail®.

5. Determine the requirement for processing a Parcel Search Request.

6. Determine the requirement for processing a Report of Rifled Parcel.

7. Recall the procedures for processing a Sender’s Application for Recall of Mail.

8. Recall the procedures for processing an Application and Voucher for Refund of Postage and Fees.

9. Recall the procedures for processing a money order inquiry.

INQUIRIES OR COMPLAINTS

An INQUIRY is a request for information. Inquiries are received almost daily regarding mail service to Navy personnel. Inquiries may be received over the phone, in person or in writing; and they may concern any phase of postal operations. Most inquiries are usually simple questions concerning mail transit times, mail preparation or some other phase of postal operations.

A COMPLAINT is an expression of dissatisfaction, discontent, disappointment, or resentment concerning any postal product, service or postal personnel. Mail complaints are attributable, in many instances, to incomplete or incorrect information. The number of mail complaints could be reduced greatly if Commanding Officers, within security limitations, kept service members and their families informed of probable mail interruptions or delays. This may be done through the Plan of the Day, Family Grams, and Pre-Deployment briefings.

CHAPTER 23

p. 607

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-2

Family Grams and briefings should explain the reasons for probable mail delays such as ship transit periods between ports, remote operational areas, shifting operational commitments, adverse weather. A better understanding of what to expect on a deployment can greatly reduce the anxieties of family members and can help reduce the number of complaints from family members and friends. The continued use of Family Grams during deployments to advise the crew of prevailing conditions that may affect mail service will help dispel rumors that cause misunderstandings that lead to complaints.

Information should be provided to Naval personnel and their correspondents before and during deployment. Keeping everyone informed enhances the morale of the crew and saves the Navy money by avoiding unnecessary administrative work in processing complaints.

When inquiries of a congressional level or other high-level interest are referred by Military Postal Service Agency (MPSA) to Commanding Officers for investigation, the command should provide at minimum, the following information:

• Summary of an interview with the person or persons involved outlining any difficulty experienced in receiving or sending mail

• Any special circumstances that may have affected mail service

• Evidence of other individuals experiencing similar difficulties

• If the individual presently receives mail from correspondents and specifically from the person registering the complaint

• When complaints involve a specific item of mail, an indication if that item was eventually received

• Correct mailing address of the person involved

• Average transit time for all classes of mail to and from the address of mailing

• A statement concerning the quality of mail service

• Any additional information that will assist in formulating a reply.

NOTE

Responses should be provided in the same manner as received within operational considerations

Commanding Officers must answer all allegations in the complaint. This will eliminate complaints being returned for additional information.

Forms Needed

The following is a list of some of the most commonly used postal service claims and inquiry forms that are needed to file claims for indemnity, process customer complaints, and report mistreatment of mail:

• PS Form 673, Report of Rifled Parcel

• PS Form 1000, Domestic or International Claim

p. 608

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-3

• PS Form 1509, Sender’s Application for Recall of Mail

• PS Form 2856, Damage Report of Insured Parcels and Contents

• PS Form 3533, Application for Refund of Fees, Products and Withdrawal of Customer Accounts

• PS Form 3760, Parcel Search Request

• PS Form 6401, Money Order Inquiry (postal card).

When processing claims and inquiries, Military Postal Clerks (MPCs) will use the appropriate form(s) listed above, depending on whether the claim or inquiry is for Domestic or International mail. Detailed instructions for completing these forms are contained in the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM), the International Mail Manual (IMM),/or the Postal Operations Manual (POM). Money order inquiries and certain International Mail claims (refer to the IMM) require customers to pay processing fees.

Failure to properly prepare, or make proper disposition of a postal claim or inquiry may delay results. The Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE) should assist in completing claim forms and review all claims before they are finalized.

Responding to Mistreatment of Mail

Mistreatment of mail is a general term that includes the loss, rifling of,/or damage to mail. Customers should be encouraged to report instances of mistreatment of mail even in cases where there are no provisions for payment of indemnity. Inquiries, complaints, claims may be filed at any post office.

Normally, you will be concerned only with the processing of inquiries, complaints and claims for domestic mail matter. International inquiries, complaints and claims are seldom received at MPO’s. If you receive an international claim or inquiry, refer to Chapter 9 of the IMM for guidance.

The information in this chapter, along with some on the job training will enable you to process efficiently inquiries, complaints and claims. Remember, filing a claim or inquiry is the right of the mailer or addressee and you should always be helpful and treat the customer with the utmost courtesy.

Military Postal Service Agency— Customer Mail Inquiry Comment Card

The MPSA customer mail inquiry comment card is designed to be used by military postal customers for recording complaints, suggestions, information requests, compliments and inquiries for ordinary mail. This form must be completed online via the Military Postal Service Agency Web site. Before referring a patron to this website for negative comments or complaints, the MPO supervisor must make all attempts to remedy the customer’s dissatisfaction. Once an inquiry or complaint is brought to the attention of the MPO supervisor, the MPO supervisor must:

• Investigate the reasons for the complaint and obtain resolution, if possible

• Contact the customer within 24 hours of receipt of the comment or complaint and advise them of the planned action or resolution

• Provide the customer with a final response within 14 calendar days after receiving the comment or complaint.

Any written customer complaints should be maintained in a central location. All complaints should be recorded on a customer complaint control log. The date a complaint was closed must be entered on

p. 609

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-4

the control log. For other information that must be entered on a customer complaint log, refer to the Postal Operations Manual.

DOMESTIC OR INTERNATIONAL CLAIM (PS FORM 1000) (INDEMNITY CLAIM)

A CLAIM is a request by a customer for an indemnity payment that resulted from the loss, damage or missing contents of an Express Mail®, Registered Mail™, in sured piece or ordinary uninsured international parcel. If a customer purchased insurance at the time he/she mailed an article, mailed it Registered Mail™ with insurance, or mailed it Express Mail®, they may file an indemnity claim to recover the value of the item if it becomes lost or damaged. For domestic and international mail, PS Form 1000, Domestic or International Claim, (Figure 23-1) is used to file a claim for indemnity. This form also is used to make inquiries only (no indemnity) on uninsured registered domestic mail.

p. 610

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-5

Figure 23-1 — Example of Domestic or International Claim, PS Form 1000, Page 1.

Who May File

A claim may be filed by the following:

• Either the mailer or addressee, for damaged articles or articles with some or all of the contents missing

• Either the mailer or addressee who is in possession of the original retail mailing receipt for lost articles.

Time Limits for Filing

The time limits for filing lost claims are located on page 2 of PS Form 1000 (Figure 23-2).

Figure 23-2 — Example of Time Limits for Filing Claims and Inquiries, PS Form 1000, Page 2.

These time limits list the time the mailer must wait to file a claim for articles that have not been delivered (complete loss). Do not overlook the bottom of the chart, which refers to Army or Air Force Post Offices (APOs) and Fleet Post Offices (FPOs). Time limits for filing can also be located in the DMM. Some of the time limits are as follows:

• 7 days or more after the date of mailing for Express Mail®

• 15 days or more for items sent as Registered Mail™

• 21 days after the date of mailing for insured items sent as First-Class and Priority Mail

• 45 days after the date of mailing for insured items sent First-Class mail, Space Available Mail (SAM) or Parcel Airlift (PAL) to APOs and FPOs

• 75 days or more after the date of mailing for insured surface items mailed to APOs and FPOs.

p. 611

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-6

If an article is received in damaged condition, or some of the contents were lost, then the claim should be filed immediately but must file no later than 60 days from the date of mailing.

Where to File

There are three ways to submit domestic claims for indemnity for loss or damage.

• By submitting the required information to any post office, station or branch

• The patron can complete the PS Form 1000 and mail it

• Submit at www.usps.com/insuranceclaims/online.htm for Insured, Registered and Express Mail®.

How to File A Claim

A customer may file PS Form 1000 at a local Post Office, which will then forward the form to Accounting Services in St. Louis. Customers may print PS Form 1000 from www.usps.com/insuranceclaims. Evidence of value is required and must accompany the PS Form 1000. Evidence of insurance must be retained by the customer until the claim is resolved. Upon written request by the USPS, the customer must submit proof of damage for damaged items or missing contents, in person to a local Post Office for inspection, retention, disposition in accordance with the claims decision.

Customers may file a claim by completing a PS Form 1000, Domestic or International Claim, mailing it to Domestic Claims, Accounting Services, P.O. Box 80143, St Louis, MO, 63180-0143. Customers may print PS Form 1000 from www.usps.com/insuranceclaims. Evidence of value is required and must accompany the PS Form 1000. Evidence of insurance must be retained by the customer until the claim is resolved. Upon written request by the USPS, the customer must submit proof of damage for damaged items or missing contents, in person to a local Post Office for inspection, retention, disposition in accordance with the claims decision.

Customers may file a claim online for Insured Mail™ and Express Mail® at www.usps.com/insuranceclaims/online.htm. Evidence of value is required and may be submitted as an uploaded file or sent via First-Class Mail to Domestic Claims, Accounting Services. Evidence of insurance must be retained by the customer until the claim is resolved. Upon written request by the USPS, the customer must submit proof of damage for damaged items or missing contents, in person to a local Post Office for inspection, retention, disposition in accordance with the claims decision. Registered Mail™ claim s cannot be filed online.

Evidence of Insurance

The customer must first show that insurance, Registered, or Express Mail® service was purchased (evidence of insurance). Either of the following is acceptable:

• The original mailing receipt issued at the time of mailing. Except for Registered Mail™, a photocopy of the original mailing receipt is acceptable. If the original mailing receipt, or a photocopy of such receipt, is not available, the original USPS sales receipt listing the mailing receipt number and insurance amount is acceptable. Customers filing online claims may scan the receipt and submit as an uploaded file.

• The wrapper showing the names and addresses of the sender and the addressee and the proper mail endorsement, tag, or label showing that the article was sent Insured, Registered

p. 612

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-7

with postal insurance, or Express Mail®. If only the wrapper is submitted, indemnity can be limited to $100 for Insured, $100 for Registered Mail™, $100 for Express Mail®.

The customer must retain evidence showing that the particular service was purchased until the claim is resolved.

Evidence of Value

The customer, either the mailer or the addressee, must submit acceptable evidence to establish the cost or value of the article at the time it was mailed. For claims submitted online, the evidence may be scanned and uploaded or sent via First-Class Mail to Domestic Claims, Accounting Services. Other evidence may be requested to help determine an accurate value. Examples of acceptable evidence are:

• A sales receipt, invoice, or statement of value from a reputable dealer

• Paid repair bills. Estimates of repair costs or appraisals if the claim is for partial damage. The USPS will not make payment for repair costs in excess of the original purchase price. It is best to describe the item in sufficient detail, otherwise the claim may be returned for more information

• A picture from a catalog showing the value of a similar article

• A statement from the customer describing the article that was lost or damaged, the date and location where the item was purchased, cost of the item and whether the item was new or used. If the article was handmade, the price of the materials and labor used

• A copy of a canceled check, money order receipt, credit card statement, or other documentation indicating the amount paid. For Internet purchases, a copy of the front and back of the canceled check, money order, or a copy of the credit card billing statement is required.

Claims for indemnity cannot exceed the amount for which the customer paid insurance, or the amount that the customer actually paid for the article. For example, if a customer purchased an item for $25.00 and insured the item for $100.00, they may only file a $25.00 claim (the actual cost of the item). Likewise, if the customer purchased the item for $100.00, only insured it for $25.00, they would only be allowed to claim $25.00, because of the amount of insurance purchased.

Proof of Damage or Loss

If the addressee files a claim for damage or loss of some items, the addressee must retain the damaged article and mailing container, including wrapping, packaging, contents, must, upon written request by the USPS, make them available for inspection. If the mailer files the claim, Accounting Services in St. Louis may notify the addressee by letter to present the damaged article and mailing container, including any wrapping, packaging, any other contents received, to a local post office for inspection, retention, and disposition in accordance with the claims decision. Failure to do so will result in denial of the claim.

When processing a claim MPO personnel must prepare a damage report on PS Form 2856, Damage Report of Insured Parcel and Contents, (Figure 10-3) detailing the condition of the item at the time of delivery, indicate whether the item was properly packaged to withstand normal handling in domestic mail.

If an article is claimed to be lost, proof of the loss must be submitted before a post office accepts a claim. A proof of loss can be done by the addressee completing a PS Form 1000 denying receipt of

p. 613

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-8

the article or a letter or statement from the addressee stating the article was never received. A copy of the letter or statement must be attached to the claim.

If a lost Registered, Insured, or Express Mail® article is recovered after payment of a claim, the payee may accept the article and reimburse the USPS for the full amount paid if the article is undamaged. If the article is damaged, has depreciated in value, or is missing contents, the payee may accept it and reimburse the USPS an amount determined by the St Louis ASC.

Duplicate Claims

A customer may file a duplicate claim. The claim must be submitted no sooner than 30 days and no later than 60 days from the date the original claim was filed.

p. 614

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-9

Figure 23-3 — Example of a Damage Report of Insured Parcel and Contents, PS Form 2856.

INTERNATIONAL INQUIRIES AND CLAIMS

Inquiries can be initiated for Registered items, Insured and ordinary parcels. Customers must contact the International Inquiry Center (IIC) for inquiries relating to international Registered or Insured express articles. Inquiries are not accepted for ordinary letters, Priority Mail International flat-rate envelopes, or Priority Mail International small flat-rate boxes. The sender or addressee is the only

p. 615

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-10

person that may inquire about an article. Customers must wait a minimum of seven days for an international item to be delivered in the foreign country before initiating an inquiry. When there is a determination that an item has been lost, the International Inquiry Center will mail a claim packet to the customer. The packet will include a PS Form 1000, PS Form 2856 and letter of instruction on how to complete and submit the claim.

Claims may be filed for Express Mail® International, Registered items, Insured and ordinary parcels. Claims may not be filed for ordinary letters. Claims for Registered items and Insured and ordinary parcels may not be filed until after an inquiry has been completed. Claims for items that have damaged or missing contents should be filed immediately. Claims for Registered items and Insured and ordinary parcels delivered to the addressee in damaged condition or with missing contents are payable only to the addressee, unless the addressee waives the right to payment, in writing, in favor of the sender. All claims for inbound international Registered items and Insured and ordinary parcels received in damaged condition or with missing contents must be supported by PS Form 2856. If the addressee does not accept delivery and the item is returned to the sender, the sender will be the payee of the claim.

When an international claim is presented at your post office, it is your responsibility as a clerk to ensure the following:

• Verify that all applicable fields on PS Form 1000 are complete.

• Prepare a damage report on PS Form 2856, detailing the condition of the item at the time of delivery, indicate whether or not the item was properly packaged to withstand normal handling in international mail.

• Attach the damage report and documentation of indemnity and value to the claim.

• Send PS Form 1000 and related documents, including the customs label and the wrapper, if appropriate, to the following address: INTERNATIONAL CLAIMS Accounting Services P.O. BOX 80146 ST LOUIS MO 63180–0146

Refer to the IMM to identify the requirements with your particular case.

PARCEL SEARCH REQUEST

When the contents of a parcel of domestic origin are separated from the wrapper, you should inform the sender by completing Parcel Search Request, PS Form 3760 (Figure 23-4). If the parcel is of foreign origin, send the PS Form 3760, appropriately modified, to the addressee.

REPORT OF RIFLED PARCEL

Domestic or international parcels, except items sent as Registered Mail™, found to be rifled, should be reported on Report of Rifled Parcel, PS Form 673 (Figure 23-5). PS Form 673 is a four-page set with instructions for completion contained on the reverse side of the form. When completed, the entire set should be forwarded immediately to the USPS Postal Inspection Service. Include the wrapper or carton of the rifled parcel, if totally emptied of contents, the sack or pouch label. Report every attempt at rifling of ordinary parcels, whether partially or completely emptied of contents, or if contents appear intact. Distinguish carefully between rifled parcels and parcels damaged in handling.

p. 616

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-11

Figure 23-4 — Example of a Parcel Search Request, PS Form 3760.

p. 617

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-12

Figure 23-5 — Example of a Report of Rifled Parcel, PS Form 673.

SENDER’S APPLICATION FOR RECALL OF MAIL

With proper identification, the sender or the sender’s representative may recall mail deposited in collection boxes or at post offices. Sender’s Application for Recall of Mail, PS Form 1509, used for this purpose, (Figure 23-6) is submitted to the postmaster at the office of mailing. The mailer must pay all expenses of recalling mail (including return postage for other than First-Class Mail). If mail recalled before dispatch is again presented for mailing, the original stamps are accepted for postage at face value. This provision does not apply to stamps used to pay for registry or insurance fees. For requests on international mail, if the mail can be intercepted in the United States, it can be withdrawn from the mail. However if the mail has left the United States, it can only be intercepted if the country

p. 618

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-13

of destination provides this service. The USPS does not guarantee success in preventing delivery of all pieces in a withdrawn mailing.

MONEY ORDER INQUIRY

Money Order Inquiry, PS Form 6401, (Figure 23-8) is used to file an inquiry about payment of a postal money order. A customer (purchaser, payee, or endorsee only) may complete, sign, submit PS Form 6401 for any inquiry on the status of a money order. When the USPS Money Order Branch receives PS Form 6401 from a customer, it reviews USPS records and completes one of the following actions:

If the money order was not cashed, a replacement money order will be issued 60 days after the purchase date.

If the money order was cashed, a photocopy of the paid money order will be issued immediately to the customer filing the inquiry.

Customers may submit PS Form 6401 at any time (there is no waiting period), must pay the applicable fee for each money order inquiry submitted. For money order inquiry fee rates, refer to the DMM. Each PS Form 6401 covers only one money order. When completing PS Form 6401, the customer must present the original money order receipt. The Military Postal Clerk will assist the customer in completing PS Form 6401 and then upon payment of the inquiry fee, affix stamps or a postage meter tape on the form where indicated to show the fee was paid. (This form is self-explanatory, the information is taken from the customer’s original money order receipt). If stamps were used, they must be cancelled with the flag-stamp cancellation device.

p. 619

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-14

Figure 23-8 — Example of Money Order Inquiry, PS Form 6401.

p. 620

LS: Chapter 23— Claims and Inquiries Rev. MAR 2013 23-15

(This page was left blank intentionally).

p. 621

Rev. MAR 2013 24-1

LS: Chapter 24—M ail Directory Service

CHAPTER 24

MAIL DIRECTORY SERVICE

Directory service assists you in delivering mail to personnel, and in forwarding or returning mail addressed to personnel no longer at your command. When mail is addressed to a person who is not attached to an activity served by your post office, it is just as important to provide proper disposition of this mail as it is to deliver the mail.

Early disposition of mail is the basic purpose of mail directory service. This is true whether the mail is to be delivered on board, forwarded when an addressee has transferred, held pending arrival of the addressee, or given treatment appropriate to certain other categories. Examples of “certain other categories” are mail for casualties and unauthorized absentees.

Each Navy command is required to maintain a mail directory file of all personnel receiving mail through the activity regardless of whether the command operates a Military Post Office (MPO). This includes maintaining files on personnel ordered to report to, and personnel transferred from the activity. At commands that have a Military Postal Clerk, providing mail directory service is a part of the post office operation. Commands that do not have a MPO and those receiving mail services through a U.S. civil post office must maintain directory files as part of the unit mail clerk operation or mail orderly system. Commands can maintain a hardcopy OPNAV 5110/5 NOTICE OF CHANGE OF ADDRESS and or the Navy Directory service program. It is recommended that command maintain both, using the OPNAV 5110/5 as a backup file.

Under an agreement between the U.S. Postal Service (USPS) and Department of Defense (DoD), the DoD agrees to provide directory service for undeliverable-as-addressed military mail and endorse each piece to show a forwarding address or a reason for non-delivery. Even though the Commanding Officer is responsible for directory service, as a Military Postal Clerk (MPC), you are the representative of the Commanding Officer for postal matters. Thus, you are responsible for operating and maintaining the directory service for your command.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Recall the procedures for maintaining directory files and for processing directory mail.

2. Recall the proper processing procedures for the various classes of mail requiring directory service.

3. Identify the different types of, and the required handling for hold mail.

POSTAL DIRECTORY FUNCTIONS

All postal activities providing mail delivery service to individuals should maintain a directory file of personnel who receive mail through their facility. Normally, MPOs do not keep postal directory cards for personnel who served through a “Mail Address Only (MAO)” or subordinate unit mailroom. Directory files should include a record of all personnel served, including those on Temporary Duty (TDY), personnel who are due to report and personnel who have transferred. Maintain directory files

CHAPTER 24

p. 622

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-2

as one file. A directory for onboard personnel and another file for transferred personnel is not necessary and should be avoided. The postal directory file for individuals assigned to your command should contain, at a minimum, the complete name, rate/rank, last four digits of the Social Security number, mailing address, and, whenever possible, the individual’s previous mailing address. Finally, MPOs and unit mailrooms should provide directory service for improperly addressed official mail.

Filing Instructions

The mail directory file consists of Notice of Change of Address cards, OPNAV Form 5110/5 (for an example click here. The directory cards should be arranged in alphabetical order, by last name, regardless of rank, rating, or status. Use a set of alphabetical separators to divide the cards (Figure 24-1). Last names starting with the same letter are filed behind the same separator. If the last names are the same, use an individual’s first and middle name to determine the filing order.

If your directory is large, you may need to use additional separators within letters. For example, S might be broken down into SA, SE, SM, and ST. Last names beginning with the letter S should then be filed after the closest preceding second letter of the separator, thus Schiller would go after SA; Slade after SE; Souder after SM; and Swain after ST. You will learn from experience and the size of your directory whether your card file should be subdivided within letters.

Personnel receiving mail for accompanying family members at their military address will list their family members on the sponsor’s directory card. If an individual has family members with a different last name, a separate card should be prepared and filed. This card should be cross-referenced with the sponsor’s card so that it will be maintained in an identical manner. In addition, a separate card should be prepared and cross-referenced for individuals who have a name change.

Figure 24-1 — Example of a directory card file with alphabetical separators.

The postal directory file card for individuals who have detached should include the date detached, the purge date, the forwarding address, and, if the address is a military unit, a projected reporting date

p. 623

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-3

(due-in date). If personnel are transferred for further assignment and their new permanent duty station is not known at the time of transfer, transferees should furnish you with a nonmilitary address to which you can forward their mail until they arrive at their new duty station. If this is not possible, endorse the change of address card to indicate the activity to which reporting for further assignment, if known, and the person’s status; for example, “Transferred to (enter the name of the activity) for further assignment.” When individuals report to their ultimate duty stations, they should send you a change of address card showing their new permanent address. When you receive directory cards with a person’s current address, replace the old cards in the directory file and forward mail as required.

Also, you should inform transferees that delivery of mail while they are en route to their new duty station is impractical, and advise them against the use of an intermediate activity as an interim address. Suggest to them, instead, that they use a nonmilitary address on their change of address cards.

If a person is transferred for discharge, a complete civilian forwarding address should be furnished. If discharged personnel do not want to have their mail forwarded to a civilian address, they must indicate this on their directory card and sign the card. In this case, their mail is marked "NOT DELIVERABLE AS ADDRESSED—U NABLE TO FORWARD" and returned to the mailer. Advise transferees to notify correspondents of their new address as soon as possible, to reduce the amount of mail received after a person transfers. The sooner individuals advise their correspondents of the change, the fewer pieces of mail you will have to forward to them. Personnel being transferred should advise publishers of their new address or notify publishers to discontinue mailings of subscription matter until advised of a new permanent address. The OPNAV Form 5110/5 is used for this purpose. Be sure that the publication key number, when available, is entered on the card. Your customer may be able to obtain this number from the old address label. Most publishers and firms specifically request that both the old and the new addresses be furnished, and that an old address label be provided to aid in identifying the subscriber or the customer, and the account. This can be done by taping the old address label to the change of address card. Ensure that the new address is not covered or otherwise made illegible.

Purging Directory Cards for Destruction

When an individual is no longer served by the postal activity, code the directory card for destruction so that a minimum of 12 months directory service is provided. For example, if an individual departs in May 2009, code the directory card for destruction in June 2010 (for an example click here). If an individual was TDY or in student status for six months or less, code the directory card for destruction in three months.

During the first workweek of each month, the directory file should be screened and all expired cards removed and destroyed. One way to readily identify cards to be removed from the files is to put the number of the month and the year in which the card is to be removed and destroyed to the left of the date on the change of address card. In addition, you can color code the cards for each month, which makes purging easier.

Where do you get the information used to prepare and maintain directory cards? At most commands, local procedures for personnel reporting and transferring require that they check in and out with the office that maintains the mail directory service--ordinarily the MPO of the command. By doing so, personnel concerned prepare the necessary cards as required. At certain times, this may not be possible. Examples are personnel admitted to a hospital while on leave or liberty because of illness or an accident, personnel who are casualties or unauthorized absentees, or personnel held in custody by civil authorities. In these situations, directory personnel should prepare the cards. Advance copies

p. 624

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-4

of orders, and rosters of attached squadrons and/or detachments are all excellent sources of information for obtaining the necessary data to maintain a current mail directory file. In addition, you may be informed of an expected arrival through the receipt of a change-of-address card that was prepared at another command when a person transferred to your command.

Navy Directory Service Program

The procedures for developing a command directory file using OPNAV Form 5110/5 were discussed in the previous paragraphs. Now we discuss how commands with computers in their MPOs can set up their directory system.

The Postal Policy Division at Commander Naval Supply Systems Command developed an automated postal directory program intended for use by all Naval activities to provide directory service on undeliverable-as-addressed mail. See (Figures 24-2 and 24-3) for example screen shots. Use of this program reduces the time required to process directory mail. As with all computer systems that store personal information, ensure that you follow strict Personally Identifiable Information (PII) protocols. Also, ensure that the system data is backed-up on a regular basis to CD, external hard drive or OPNAV5110/5 cards. Doing so saves the time required to rebuild the database in case of computer or program failure. A copy of this program can be requested through your local Postal Assistance Advisors office.

Figure 24-2 — Example Login screen of Navy Postal Directory System (NPDS).

p. 625

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-5

Figure 24-3 — Example Directory Card using Naval Postal Directory System.

Processing Directory Mail

Directory Mail is mail that cannot be delivered as addressed because it bears an incomplete or incorrect mailing address. Mail may be undeliverable, temporarily or permanently, for any number of reasons. Those reasons include that the mail may be incorrectly addressed, the addressee may have transferred, or the mail may be unclaimed or refused.

Mail received at your MPO or unit mailroom for personnel having forwarding addresses on file presents no great problem. The mail is suitably endorsed and promptly forwarded, according to procedures described later in this chapter. Mail that is undeliverable because it bears an incomplete or an incorrect address is processed against the directory cards. If an individual’s correct address can be determined, the mail is delivered. Otherwise, it is returned to the sender endorsed as “ATTEMPTED— NOT KNOWN.”

Sometimes it may be difficult to find the proper directory card for a piece of undeliverable mail. This is often because of carelessly written addresses, which are easily misread. The following letters of the alphabet most frequently cause trouble: a and o; h and k; i and e; n and r; n and u. Suppose you are unable to find the directory card for Douglas, Thomas. You might also check under Thomas, Douglas (in the event that the names might have been transposed). Or check Douglas, Tom or Tommy (in the event that a nickname is used instead of the proper first name. Also, be alert for names ending with the letter e, such as Browne, Harte, or Thorne, in the event that the e was incorrectly added, or was omitted but should have been used. Do not consider any piece of mail undeliverable until you have considered every possible card in your directory file.

p. 626

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-6

Now that you have learned how to set-up and maintain your directory files, you are ready to process directory mail. Express Mail® must be provided directory service immediately, First-Class and Priority mail within 24 hours of receipt, and other classes of mail as soon as possible after receipt. Directory mail received on weekends or holidays must be processed no later than the next duty day. First, you should separate the mail by classes and categories, such as First-Class letter mail, magazines and newspapers, parcels, and so forth. Then, put the mail in alphabetical order, since your directory files are maintained this way. This is not necessary for the automated system. Now that items are in order, look up the name of the person in your directory files. If there is a forwarding address on file, the following general guidelines apply:

• Draw a single diagonal line through the incorrect address

• Make required endorsements neatly and legibly, use the least amount of space as possible on the front of the mail

• Place the initial forwarding address below and to the right of the original address. If all available space on the front of the mail is used, write OVER on the front and place additional endorsements on the back

• Gummed labels may be placed over old addresses to give additional writing space if needed. However, the name of the addressee should not be written or stamped over or covered by gummed labels

• When using the automated directory system, a label printed with the forwarding address must be placed over the incorrect address. However, the name of the addressee must not be covered up

• If letter mail being directed bears a bar code, directory clerks must totally obliterate this code. If this code is not obliterated, letter mail being forwarded will be returned because of the USPS automated system (Optical Character Reader (OCR)), which reads bar codes, not the forwarding addresses.

If the mail is being forwarded to a military unit, include the due-in date. However, this procedure is not necessary if the date is already past.

• All Priority, First-Class, and Parcel Post articles endorsed ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED and FORWARDING SERVICE REQUESTED must be endorsed with a forwarding address if one is available and forwarded to the addressee

• Priority Mail and Parcel Post articles being forwarded must be endorsed CHANGE OF ADDRESS DUE TO OFFICIAL ORDERS. However, if the mail bears an endorsement that restricts forwarding, then it should be returned to the mailer.

The Directory Service Stamp

Each piece of mail given directory service, including hold mail, should be stamped on the reverse side of the article with the directory service stamp (Figure 24-4). The directory service stamp should not be larger than 1 l/2 by l 1/2 inches and should contain the following information:

• The name of the command or activity

• The date the article was received in the directory section

• The date the mail was forwarded or returned to the sender

• The directory clerk’s initials.

p. 627

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-7

When using the computerized Navy Directory Service Program, applying the directory service stamp on the reverse side of articles is unnecessary. This is because the date the mail was forwarded and the directory clerk’s initials print out on the label.

Figure 24-4 — Example of a directory service stamp.

Holding Period for Ordinary Mail

Undeliverable mail for which there is an indication that the individual is due to arrive is held for 15 days past the anticipated arrival date. If unclaimed at that time, determine the individual’s status by contacting the gaining unit or the military or civilian personnel office, and make disposition accordingly. If there is no status change, return the mail to sender endorsed “ATTEMPTED—NOT KNOWN.”

• If there is no indication of a due-in date, but you have reason to believe that the individual is due to arrive because the mail is being forwarded, the sender has the same last name, or for some similar reason, hold it for 30 days

• If the mail is still unclaimed at that time, attempt to determine the individual’s status through appropriate channels and dispose of the mail accordingly. If the mail is still undeliverable, return it to sender endorsed “ATTEMPTED— NOT KNOWN.”

All hold mail should be screened against the directory files at least weekly.

Holding Period for Accountable Mail

The retention of accountable mail will be handled as follows:

• Undeliverable Express Mail® is held no longer than 5 workdays (less than 5 if indicated by the mailer).

• Undeliverable Registered, Insured, Certified and Return Receipt for merchandise mail is held a maximum of 15 days (less than 15 if indicated by the mailer).

• If a return receipt is attached to Registered, numbered Insured or Certified mail that is to be returned, indicate the reason for non-delivery on the return receipt. Leave the return receipt on

p. 628

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-8

the article and return the article to the mailer. Registered Mail™ is ret urned through the Registered Mail™ s ystem.

When forwarding or returning accountable mail, indicate the disposition of the article on a Delivery Notice/Reminder/Receipt, PS Form 3849.

Undeliverable-As-Addressed Mail

Usually non-delivery of mail is due to one of the following reasons:

• Incomplete, illegible, or incorrect address

• Addressee not at address, moved, or deceased

• Hold mail unclaimed

• Mail refused by the addressee at the time of delivery

• Mail refused by the addressee after delivery.

PROCESSING UNDELIVERABLE-AS-ADDRESSED MAIL

Because directory service is provided differently for each class or type of mail, you need to identify each piece of directory mail to provide for proper disposition. In this section, the procedures to follow when processing each class or type of undeliverable-as-addressed mail are discussed.

Express Mail®/First-Class Mail

The majority of mail you process in a directory section is First-Class letter mail. To reduce the amount of directory mail received, advise service members who are transferring to inform correspondents of their new address when one is available. All undeliverable Express and First-Class mail (including stamped cards/postcards, and Priority mail) is forwarded as many times as necessary without any additional postage charges (See Table 24-1).

p. 629

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-9

Table 24-1 — Treatment of Undeliverable-as-Addressed Express, First-Class, and Priority Mail

RULE

ENDORSEMENT MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICE SHALL: MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICE BY THE USPS SHALL:

1

NO ENDORSEMENT Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail:

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with reason for non- delivery. Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail:

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with reason for non- delivery.

2

ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail:

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

Use Notice to Mailer of Correction in Address, PS Form 3547 to provide sender with address correction. Charge applicable fee. Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

Use Notice to Mailer of Correction in Address, PS Form 3547 to provide sender with address correction. Charge applicable fee.

3

FORWARDING SERVICE REQUESTED Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with reason for non- delivery. Forward. Endorse all Priority Mail

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders.”

If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with reason for non- delivery.

4

RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED Do not forward.

Return the piece to sender with the new address or reason for non-delivery attached.

Do not forward.

Return the piece to sender with the new address or reason for non-delivery attached.

5

CHANGE SERVICE REQUESTED Do not forward. Return the piece to sender endorsed:

“Undeliverable as Addressed.”

Not Available for Express Mail®. Do not forward. Return the piece to the serving post office endorsed:

“Undeliverable as Addressed.”

Not Available for Express Mail®.

NOTE

When Express Mail®, First-Class Mail (including Priority Mail, stamped cards, and postcards) cannot be forwarded or returned to sender, they are considered “dead mail” (covered later in this chapter).

p. 630

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-10

Forwarding

The bulk of the mail that you process will not have endorsement. In these cases having no endorsement means that the sender did not endorse the mail with forwarding or return to sender request. The only information required on the address side when forwarding Express or First-Class Mail is a forwarding address and a reporting date, if known (Figure 24-5). When you forward Priority Mail, write the forwarding address on the article or print out a computer-generated address label and endorse the article “CHANGE OF ADDRESS DUE TO OFFICIAL ORDERS” (Figure 24-6). This endorsement is necessary to ensure the USPS does not charge the service member for forwarding the article. Use the endorsement “Change of Address Due To Official Orders” only when you forward mail to the addressee.

Figure 24-5 — Proper placement of forwarding address.

Figure 24-6 — Forwarding endorsement for Priority Mail piece.

p. 631

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-11

Return to Sender

When a forwarding address is unknown or the addressee’s name cannot be found in the directory card file, return the mail to the sender. Endorse this mail with the “RETURN TO SENDER” stamp and mark the reason for non-delivery “ATTEMPTED—NOT KNOWN,” which means that delivery was attempted, but the addressee is unknown (Figure 24-7).

Figure 24-7 — Returned to Sender — "Attempted-Not Known".

If the sender has requested by endorsement that mail NOT be forwarded, then the article is returned to the sender endorsed “RETURNED TO SENDER” and “UNDELIVERABLE AS ADDRESSED.” Another variation of this endorsement is “NOT DELIVERABLE AS ADDRESSED UNABLE TO FORWARD” (Figure 24-8).

Figure 24-8 — Returned to Sender — Sender requests "Do Not Forward".

p. 632

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-12

Periodicals

Periodicals are publications—m agazines and newspapers— whose primary purpose is transmitting information to an established list of subscribers or requesters. Directory clerks process a large volume of periodicals. The primary reason is because individuals do not inform their publishers that they are moving or have already moved. The volume of periodicals you process can be reduced by informing all transferring personnel to notify publishers of their new address as soon as possible. This is very important because periodicals are forwarded only for 60 days. After 60 days, newspapers and magazines are distributed to military hospitals, recreation services, dormitories, chaplains, or turned over to the nearest DOD property disposal office as salvage paper, or treated as waste, unless copies are endorsed “ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED,” which requires them to be returned to the sender with address correction or reason for non-delivery attached (See Table 24-2).

Table 24-2 — Treatment of Undeliverable-as-Addressed Periodicals

RULE

ENDORSEMENT

MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICE SHALL:

MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICE BY THE USPS SHALL:

1

NO ENDORSEMENT Forward for 60 days. Before forwarding, process PS Form 3579. Endorse:

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders”

If a forwarding address is unknown or after 60-day period, process PS Form 3579 again, then dispose as waste.

Forward for 60 days. Before forwarding, process PS Form 3579. Endorse:

“Change of Address Due to Official Orders”

If a forwarding address is unknown, or after 60-day period, process PS Form 3579 again. Piece is disposed of by USPS.

2

ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED

Forward for 60 days. Endorse, “Change of Address Due to Official Orders”

If a forwarding address is unknown or after 60-day period, attach PS Form 3579. Then return to sender with address correction or endorsed with reason for non-delivery and “Postage Due.” Do not compute postage.

Forward for 60 days. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders”

If a forwarding address is unknown or after 60-day period, attach PS Form 3579. Then return to sender with address correction or endorsed with reason for non-delivery, and “Postage Due.” Do not compute postage.

NOTE

Forwarding Service Requested, Return Service Requested, and Change Service Requested are not available for Periodicals.

Forwarding Magazines

p. 633

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-13

Forward magazines for reassigned personnel 60 days after their departure. Directory clerks must endorse this mail—“ CHANGE OF ADDRESS DUE TO OFFICIAL ORDERS” and “ADVISE YOUR CORRESPONDENT OR PUBLISHER OF YOUR CORRECT MAILING ADDRESS” (Figure 24-9). When this step is complete, forward the article to the addressee. In addition, you should update the directory card, or the automated directory file (as appropriate) by annotating the name of the magazine and date the notification was sent.

Figure 24-9 — Forwarding Endorsements for magazines.

Do not forward magazines after the 60-day forwarding period has expired. On the first copy of a magazine received more than 60 days after an individual transfers:

• Prepare an Undeliverable Standard Mail, PS Form 3579 listing the forwarding address

• Affix the PS Form 3579 near the old address or address label

• Cut out the PS Form 3579 and that portion of the publication, wrapper, or envelope containing the old address and place inside USPS envelope EP-1865-D (Figure 24-10)

• Mail the envelope to the publisher (sender) after doing the following:

o Entering your command’s return address in the upper left-hand corner of the envelope.

o Computing the postage due (refer to the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM) for amount to charge per notice).

• Entering the number of notices enclosed.

• Entering the publisher’s (sender’s) address in the address space.

• Make an entry on the directory card or automated directory file that a PS Form 3579 was sent to prevent a duplicate form being sent.

p. 634

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-14

Figure 24-10 — PS Form 3579 sent to Publisher.

Forwarding Newspapers

Newspapers addressed to personnel reassigned to an area served by the same postmaster are forwarded for a period of 60 days. Directory clerks must endorse newspapers: “CHANGE OF ADDRESS DUE TO OFFICIAL ORDERS” and “ADVISE YOUR CORRESPONDENT OR PUBLISHER OF YOUR CORRECT MAILING ADDRESS." Newspapers addressed to personnel who have been reassigned to an area NOT served by the same postmaster WILL NOT be forwarded.

Process as follows:

• Prepare a PS Form 3579 listing the forwarding address and mark it “NOT DELIVERABLE AS ADDRESSED—U NABLE TO FORWARD”

• Affix the PS Form 3579 near the old address or address label

• Cut out the PS Form 3579 and that portion of the newspaper containing the old address and place inside a USPS envelope, EP 1865-D

• Mail the envelope to the publisher (sender) after you have completed the following:

• Place your command’s return address in the upper left-hand corner of the envelope

• Compute the postage due (refer to the DMM for amount to charge per notice)

• Enter the publisher’s (sender’s) address in the address space

• Make an entry on the directory card or automated directory file that a PS Form 3579 was sent

• Treat the newspaper as waste.

p. 635

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-15

Treat as Waste

After preparing PS Form 3579 and removing the address label off the publication, directory clerks are authorized to give magazines and newspapers to authorized agencies or treat them as waste. Remember to make an entry on the directory card or automated directory file that a PS Form 3579 was sent to prevent duplicates.

NOTE

Remember, DO NOT destroy periodicals endorsed “Address Service Requested.” Return these publications to the publisher.

Bulk Rate/Non-Profit

This less expensive class of mail is used by businesses and organizations that mail large quantities of mail to advertise their merchandise or services. They consist of circulars, catalogs, income tax books and so on. They are easily identified because the articles bear the endorsement “Presorted Standard” or “PRST STD.” Although businesses and organizations pay a lower rate of postage, these articles are “mail” and must be processed and treated in accordance with USPS regulations (See Table 24-3). Directory clerks must pay attention to mailer endorsements (if any) to prevent incorrect disposition of the mail.

Catalogs

Catalogs are mailed at the bulk rate of postage and are considered to be of no value. Undeliverable catalogs should be disposed of as follows:

• If overseas, remove and destroy the wrapper and/or label. In addition, this applies to those catalogs bearing the endorsements ADDRESS/FORWARDING/RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED. Catalogs may then be given to any authorized customer or placed in the military post office lobby for customer use

• If in the United States, you should follow the instructions listed in Table 24-3.

Income Tax Booklet

Income tax booklets that are undeliverable as addressed should be released to the appropriate local office designated by the Commanding Officer. Normally, the Legal Officer for the command provides this service. Before releasing undeliverable income tax booklets remove and destroy all address labels. Postal bulletin notices pertaining to non-release of income tax booklets do not apply at military post offices.

Parcel Post

Parcel Post contains matter, other than personal correspondence, weighing over 13 ounces and up to 70 pounds and consists mainly of parcels. Process Parcel Post in accordance with USPS instructions (See Table 24-4).

p. 636

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-16

Table 24-3 — Treatment of Undeliverable-as-Addressed Bulk Rate/Non-Profit Mail

RULE ENDORSEMENT MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY

SERVICED SHALL: MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY

SERVICED BY THE USPS SHALL:

NO 1 ENDORSEMENT (MPCs, Unit mail clerks and mail orderlies). Endorse each piece of mail as “Undeliverable as Addressed,” and return to the serving MPO. (MPO) Destroy as waste. MPO’s shall not forward or return this mail. Endorse each piece as, “Undeliverable as Addressed.” Return to the servicing USPS facility.

Piece disposed of by USPS.

ADDRESS 2 SERVICE REQUESTED

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” Prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer advising of new address. If forwarding address is unknown, return piece to sender, endorsed with reason for non-delivery and “Postage Due.” Do not compute postage.

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” Prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer advising of new address. If forwarding address is unknown, return piece to sender, endorsed with reason for non-delivery and “Postage Due”. Do not compute postage.

FORWARDING 3 SERVICE REQUESTED

RETURN 4 SERVICE REQUESTED

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non- delivery and Postage Due. Do not compute postage.

Return piece with new address or reason for non-delivery attached. Endorse: "Postage Due" Do not compute postage.

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non-delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

Return piece with new address or reason for non-delivery attached. Endorse: "Postage Due" Do not compute postage.

CHANGE 5 SERVICE REQUESTED

(MPCs, Unit mail clerks and mail orderlies). Endorse each piece of mail as: “Undeliverable as Addressed,” and return to the serving MPO. MPO prepares PS Form 3547 and sends to mailer then piece disposed of.

Prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer. Endorse each piece as: “Undeliverable as Addressed.” Return to the servicing USPS facility. Piece disposed of by USPS.

Voting and Balloting Material

Voting and balloting material should be provided directory service immediately when it cannot be delivered as addressed. If the material is undeliverable and a forwarding address is not known, it should be returned to the mailer immediately, marked with the reason for return. Do not hold for personnel due to arrive unless they are due within 30 days after receipt of the balloting material.

Mail for Personnel Confined

Instructions concerning mail for personnel confined for disciplinary reasons are in the Department of Defense Postal Manual DoD 4526.6M .for additional information click here .Mail for personnel whose forwarding addresses are on file should be endorsed and promptly forwarded. The forwarding

p. 637

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-17

address should show a post office box, or a street address, but should not indicate that the person is confined.

Table 24-4 — Treatment of Undeliverable-as-Addressed Parcel Post Matter

RULE

ENDORSEMENT MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICED SHALL: MILITARY POSTAL DIRECTORY SERVICED BY THE USPS SHALL:

1

NO ENDORSEMENT

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non-delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If a forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non-delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

2

ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED

If forwarding address is known, prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer, then forward piece to addressee endorsed, “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non- delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

If forwarding address is known, prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer, then forward piece to addressee endorsed, “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non- delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

3

FORWARDING SERVICE REQUESTED Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non- delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

Forward. Endorse “Change of Address Due to Official Orders.” If forwarding address is unknown, return to sender endorsed with the reason for non- delivery and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

4

RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED

Return to sender with new address or reason for non-delivery attached and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage. Return to sender with new address or reason for non-delivery attached and "Postage Due". Do not compute postage.

5

CHANGE SERVICE REQUESTED

(MPCs, mail clerks and mail orderlies). Endorse each piece of mail as, “Undeliverable as Addressed” and return to the serving MPO. (MPO) Prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer then piece disposed of. This endorsement is not available with special services.

Prepare PS Form 3547 and send to mailer. Endorse each piece as, “Undeliverable as Addressed”. Return to the servicing USPS facility. Piece disposed of by USPS. This endorsement is not available with special services.

Addressee Not Authorized Military Post Office Privileges

Mail received at overseas locations addressed to personnel not authorized MPO privileges should be endorsed ADDRESSEE NOT AUTHORIZED MPO PRIVILEGES and returned to the mailer. Organizations and personnel authorized use of the MPS must not use it as intermediaries for any person or organizations not specifically authorized MPO privileges. If mail is addressed in care of an individual who is authorized MPO privileges, you should notify the individual of the infraction.

p. 638

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-18

Directory Mail Returned From Unit Mailrooms

Mail that received directory service by unit mail clerks or mail orderlies should be returned to the serving postal activity separately from uncanceled outgoing mail. MPO personnel should screen the mail to make sure it is endorsed neatly and properly. If incorrect directory procedures are noted frequently after the unit mail clerk or mail orderly has been briefed on correct directory procedures, the Postal Officer should be advised.

Perishable Items

Perishable items that have a Required Delivery Date (RDD) and cannot be forwarded or returned to the mailer before spoiling should be disposed of as waste. Do not forward these items to the serving Mail Recovery Branch. Also, any perishable items obviously spoiled when received, whether deliverable or not, should be immediately disposed of as waste. You should always dispose of perishables in the presence of a witness and notify, in writing, the mailer and addressee of your action.

HOLD MAIL

Postal directories hold undeliverable as addressed mail when service members are due to arrive, Absent Without Leave (AWOL), or when the mail is addressed to “general delivery.” General delivery mail is mail received at a post office intended primarily for delivery to transients and customers who are not located permanently at an installation. Each piece of hold mail must be back-stamped to indicate the date of receipt. Mail being held is kept in a separate sorting case, sorted by last name, and screened at least weekly.

Members Due to Arrive

Mail addressed for members due to arrive, or for patrons receiving general delivery service must be held for 15 days past the anticipated arrival date. For example, if the arrival date is 15 Oct 09, then hold the mail until 30 Oct 09. If the mail is unclaimed at that time, but the member is still expected to arrive because mail is still being forwarded, (the sender has the same last name as the addressee, or for similar reasons), then hold the mail for an additional 15 to 30 days past the anticipated arrival date. For example, if you hold the mail until 30 Oct 09 and there are indications that the member is still expected to arrive, then hold the mail until 15 Nov 09.

NOTE

Mail addressed for general delivery must be provided priority directory service. Do not hold mail addressed for general delivery more than 30 days unless requested by the mailer or addressee.

If the mail is still undeliverable at the end of the 30-day period, it will be endorsed “ATTEMPTED-NOT KNOWN” and returned to the sender if there is no further indication that the member is due to arrive on a later date. When the holding period expires, the date the mail is returned to the sender must be annotated on the directory service stamp, which is placed on the back of the mail.

p. 639

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-19

Members Absent Without Leave (AWOL)

The directory card for each member in an AWOL status must be annotated with the date on which the member went AWOL. Normally, this information is provided to the post office by the individual’s unit, or by the base personnel office. The postal directory section holds mail for individuals who are in an AWOL status for 30 days. The holding period begins the day after the individual goes AWOL. After being AWOL for 30 days, these individuals become deserters. At that time, their mail is handled as follows:

• First-Class, and Priority Mail: First-Class and Priority Mail is returned to the sender endorsed “MOVED, LEFT NO ADDRESS” (Figure 24-11) with the return date annotated on the reverse side of the item

• Periodicals: PS Form 3579 is completed, by marking the box labeled “MOVED, LEFT NO ADDRESS.” If publications are endorsed “Address Service Requested” then endorse them “MOVED, LEFT NO ADDRESS and POSTAGE DUE” and return the entire publication to the publisher with PS Form 3579 attached. Annotate the return date on the item. Do not indicate the amount of the postage due

• Parcel Post, bearing the words ADDRESS SERVICE REQUESTED, RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED, or FORWARDING SERVICE REQUESTED, is returned to the sender endorsed “MOVED, LEFT NO ADDRESS and POSTAGE DUE” with the date of return annotated on the reverse side of the item. Do not indicate the amount of the postage due.

Figure 24-11 — Forwarding Endorsement for Member who is AWOL.

Refused Mail

Occasionally letters and parcels are deliverable as addressed but the addressee refuses to accept them. If so, the post office will honor the patron’s request, but there are some conditions that apply when refusing mail. They are as follows:

• Accountable mail--Express, Registered, Insured, and Certified--must be refused by the patron at the time of delivery

• Non-accountable mail may be refused at the time of delivery, or after delivery if it is returned to the post office unopened

p. 640

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-20

• Patrons must write, “REFUSED” on the front of the mail, the date the mail was refused, and sign their name (Figure 24-12). If the addressee refuses to do this, then the postal clerk must endorse the mail “REFUSED BY ADDRESSEE,” date and sign the item refused, and then return the mail to the sender.

Figure 24-12 — Endorsement on parcel Refused by customer.

Incorrectly Addressed or Illegibly Addressed Mail

Sometimes, while working at the directory section, you will receive mail that does not have the correct address, the address is not complete, or the address is illegible. Make every attempt to deliver the mail to the addressee. Search the directory card files for the person’s name and address. If an address is found, write it on the item and deliver the item.

• If the address is incorrect or part of the address is missing, write the correct/missing information on the item and deliver it (Figure 24-13)

• If a name or address cannot be found, return the item to the sender endorsed: “ATTEMPTED, NOT KNOWN"

• If the address is unreadable, return the item to the sender endorsed: “ILLEGIBLE".

First-Class Mail received from a mailer in quantities of 20 or more, addressed insufficiently, incorrectly, or containing an obviously incorrect or identical receptacle number used simply to obtain directory service will be returned to the sender endorsed: “INSUFFICIENT ADDRESS.” Mail received from mailers who continuously mail quantities of less than 20 letters simply to circumvent the procedures expressed above, also will be returned to the sender endorsed: “INSUFFICIENT ADDRESS.”

p. 641

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-21

Figure 24-13 — Incorrectly addressed item with corrected address.

Casualty Mail

Casualty mail is unique to the Military Postal Service (MPS). It can be divided into two categories-- wartime and peacetime. Wartime casualty mail is mail that cannot be delivered or forwarded for various reasons. Also included in the casualty mail status are Missing in Action (MIA), and Prisoner of War (POW). Hold all mail for personnel who are Killed In Action (KIA) until absolute verification that the next of kin have been notified is received. This verification comes from the Command Element. This mail may be held as long as necessary to prevent inadvertent disclosure of casualty status before official notification of next of kin. Once verification has been received, then the mail should be returned to the sender or forwarded to the next of kin, accompanied by a letter from the Commanding Officer (click here to get example from OPNAVINST 5112.6 series).

For peacetime purposes, casualty mail refers to personnel who have died by natural causes, or who have been killed in an accident or to personnel who are missing, or have been hospitalized. When a person dies, the procedures are the same as in wartime. Hold all mail until absolute verification that the next of kin were notified is received. Then forward the mail or return the mail as needed. Forward mail for personnel who are hospitalized once their hospital address is known or the mail can be held until the person returns to the command or unit.

Endorse casualty mail as follows:

• "DECEASED." When the member has died and the next of kin are notified

• "SEARCH." When the member’s status is unknown and the mail is forwarded to the MPO or to the casualty mail section

• "PATIENT." When the member has been hospitalized and the hospital is known. (Include the ward number and the current hospital address if known)

• "HOSPITAL SEARCH." When the member is evacuated through medical channels to an unknown hospital and mail is being forwarded to a casualty mail section.

p. 642

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-22

Under no circumstances should the endorsements "MISSING," "KILLED IN ACTION," or "WOUNDED" be placed on casualty mail.

Dead Mail

Dead mail is undeliverable matter that cannot be returned to the sender. Some reasons mail cannot be returned to the sender include the following: the Sender is unknown or, the classification of the mail does not entitle it to return service. Process dead mail as follows:

• Endorse the article with the reason for non-delivery. If the addressee is unknown, then endorse it: “ATTEMPTED—NOT KNOWN."

• Prepare a Dead Mail Matter, PS Label 22 (Figure 24-14). When the volume of dead mail is more than one item, bundle the mail. Prepare a PS Label 22 and attach it to the top item only. Each dead parcel must have a PS Label 22 attached to it.

Figure 24-14 — An example of Dead Mail Matter, Label 22.

Send all dead mail, except unendorsed Bulk Rate/Non-Profit to the respective Mail Recovery Center (MRC) for your area. Unendorsed Bulk Rate/Non-Profit articles are disposed of as waste. The complete addresses for the MRCs is listed in Table 24-5.

p. 643

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-23

Table 24-5 — Addresses for Mail Recovery Centers

All FPO AP addresses send dead mail to:

ST PAUL MAIL RECOVERY CENTER US POSTAL SERVICE PO BOX 69001 ST PAUL MN 55169-9001

All FPO AE /AA addresses send dead mail to:

ATLANTA MAIL RECOVERY CENTER US POSTAL SERVICE 5345 FULTON INDUSTRIAL BLVD ATLANTA GA 30378-2400

Do not send IDS articles to the addresses given above. Each theater of operation has a designated Mail Recovery Center where these articles are to be sent.

Mail for Decommissioned Ships and Disestablished Stations

The administrative commander for ships and mobile units, and the Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) area coordinator, or area commander for other disestablished or decommissioned activities designates an activity to perform directory service for mail received for the decommissioned unit. Directory service is performed by the designated command for a period of 60 days after decommissioning. During this time personal mail will be forwarded and official mail screened for necessary action or other appropriate disposition. Mail received after the expiration of the 60-day period is returned to the sender and endorsed to show that the activity was decommissioned.

There is an exception to this 60-day rule, however. After the expiration of the 60-day forwarding period, obvious value supply parcels addressed to decommissioned units should continue to be forwarded to the appropriate commander for disposition pending publication of the decommissioning. The command listings are deleted in serial changes to the Standard Navy Distribution List (SNDL). Obvious supply parcels received at the Joint Military Postal Activities (JMPAs) subsequent to publication in the SNDL are returned to the mailer and are endorsed to indicate that the unit has been decommissioned.

In no case may official mail addressed to a United States Ship be forwarded unopened to the new title of that ship when it has been stricken from the Navy List and transferred to a foreign government or to the Merchant Marine service.

Personnel assigned as MPCs, mail orderlies, or to other positions where their duties involve the receipt and delivery of unopened mails normally are not assigned to duties involving opening and screening official mail. Commanding Officers of ships and activities being decommissioned or placed in the reserve fleet must furnish the activity designated to provide directory service with a complete directory of officers and enlisted personnel. This directory must show the new duty station of each crewmember. Or, in the case of personnel separated from the service, the forwarding address should be furnished by the individual. The designated activity should destroy this directory information upon completion of the 60-day forwarding period.

p. 644

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-24

The command disestablished should inform the appropriate mail-routing authority, or postmaster, of the date desired for routing of mail to the unit that will provide directory service for the decommissioned unit.

Table 24-6 illustrates the correct endorsements to be used when forwarding and/or returning mail.

p. 645

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-25

Table 24-6 — Endorsements Used When Forwarding or Returning Mail

RULE THEN ENDORSE MAIL: AND: 1 AWOL (over 30 days) Moved Left No Address Return to Sender 2 Unknown Attempted-Not Known Return to Sender 3 Reassigned With current address Forward to Addressee 4 TDY/TAD with parent unit (See Note) With TDY/TAD location address Forward to Addressee 5 TDY/TAD without parent unit (See Note) With TDY/TAD location address Forward to Addressee 6 Hospitalized (non-casualty) With the hospital address (Include ward and room number if known) Forward to addressee 7 Due to arrive With date of receipt and date of arrival Hold 8 Casualty Proper endorsement Forward after notification of next of kin (see DOD Postal Manual) 9 Missent Missent to (include your unit/MPO number) Forward to addressee 10 Opened by mistake Opened by Mistake (if possible have the person who opened the mail sign their name next to the endorsement) Forward to addressee 11 Balloting material Proper endorsement See DOD Postal Manual 12 Addressed illegibly Illegible Return to Sender 13 Addressed to a receptacle number not assigned to the MPO, and the correct MPO number is not known No Such Number Return to Sender 14 Fails to bear a receptacle number or unit designation, and the correct address is not known Insufficient Address Return to Sender 15 Refused by addressee Refused or Refused by Addressee (If willing have addressee sign next to endorsement. If not clerk must sign) Return to Sender 16 Abandoned General Delivery not called for in 30 days/Receptacle mail not called for (See DOD Postal Manual) Unclaimed Return to Sender 17 Undeliverable as addressed. Standard Mail bearing endorsement, Return Service Requested Undeliverable as Addressed and Postage Due Return to Sender 18 Addressed to Commander of a receptacle number but does not contain the addressee’s name or unit number Insufficient Address Return to Sender

NOTE

Rules 4 and 5 apply only when the addressee has requested forwarding service.

p. 646

LS: Chapter 24— Mail Directory Service Rev. MAR 2013 24-26

(This page was left blank intentionally).

p. 647

Rev. MAR 2013 25-1

CHAPTER 25

POSTAL EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

At all Military Post Offices (MPOs), U.S. Postal Service (USPS) equipment, publications and supplies are to be used to the maximum extent possible to include capital and sensitive equipment.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Explain the procedures for requisitioning, receipting, and performing maintenance on USPS capital and sensitive equipment.

2. Recognize USPS non-capital and non-sensitive (non- accountable) equipment and expendable supplies, and the procedures for ordering.

3. Identify the procedures for documenting receipt of USPS supplies.

4. Identify the proper storage and maintenance procedures for postal supplies.

5. Identify the procedures for requisitioning special supply items.

6. Identify the procedures for proper disposition of USPS equipment and supplies

Office equipment, such as safes, office furniture, copying machines, and calculators, are provided by the respective military service. Individual commands provide general operating supplies such as pens, pencils, writing paper and other general office supplies needed to operate a MPO. Military Post Offices also can order General Services Administration (GSA) stock items approved by Military Postal Service Agency (MPSA) via the Major Command (MACOM) via Automated Military Postal Service (AMPS). Military postal clerks who want additional information on ordering GSA items should contact their local Postal Officer or Postal Advisor(s). DD forms and OPNAV forms required for office operation should be procured through local supply channels.

USPS forms required to be maintained in a Navy MPO are listed in the OPNAV 5112.6 series. When ordering USPS forms, labels, tags and publications refer to USPS Publication 223. Refer to USPS Publication 247 for all other USPS supplies and equipment. These are limited to those items that are not required to be furnished by the Navy. If USPS capital and sensitive equipment is needed, your MACOM and Joint Military Postal Activity (JMPA) must first approve their procurement.

USPS CAPITAL AND SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT

Capital Equipment is equipment with a service life over 1-year, costing $3,000 or more. Examples of capital equipment include Stamp Vending Machines, USPS Scales, Canceling Machines (electrical), and conveyors.

Sensitive Equipment is equipment that must be strictly controlled because of the nature of the equipment. Money order imprinters, scanners, postage meter heads and bases are some examples of sensitive equipment.

The Commanding Officer or Postal Officer shall ensure the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE) is the only individual entrusted with the custody, control, maintenance, repair, replacement, or disposition of USPS capital and sensitive equipment. The COPE receipts for all capital and sensitive (accountable

CHAPTER 25

p. 648

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-2

equipment) on a Supplies and Equipment Receipt, PS Form 1590, (Figure 25-1) when assuming responsibility of a MPO. Each time additional equipment is received, transferred, or otherwise disposed of, a new PS Form 1590 must be completed. In addition to submitting a new PS Form 1590 when there is a change of COPE, a complete inventory of all entrusted accountable items must be done by both the outgoing COPE and incoming COPE. Submit PS Form 1590 in Automated Military Postal System (AMPS) and retain a copy in the MPO files when receiving or returning equipment.

Figure 25-1 — Example of a completed PS Form 1590.

Requisitioning Capital and Sensitive Equipment

When you requisition capital and sensitive equipment items, ensure that the "Requisition for Supplies, Services, or Equipment," PS Form 7381, is filled out accurately and completely. See (Figure 25-2) for an example of a completed PS Form 7381. A separate PS Form 7381 must be used for each item requested. However, more than one of the same item can be requested on the same form. Requisitions must be forwarded to the responsible MACOM for approval. Requisitions are then submitted by the MACOM to the serving JMPA for final processing. Justification for equipment must be listed in Section 12 (Rationale) of PS Form 7381. If there is not enough space in Section 12 to enter all the necessary information, a letter of justification should be attached to the requisition. Examples of justification include renovation of a post office or replacing existing equipment that is beyond repair.

p. 649

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-3

Maintenance of Equipment

As mentioned above the COPE is primarily responsible for the upkeep of all USPS equipment assigned to the MPO. However, junior personnel could be tasked with performing the cleaning and maintenance on this equipment and should be constantly aware of its condition. USPS equipment needing repair or maintenance must be serviced to avoid further damage. When USPS equipment can no longer be repaired economically and restored to a safe and serviceable condition, replacement equipment should be requisitioned. Accountable items must be disposed of following instructions in the Navy Postal Finance Officer Handbook (NAVSUP P725) for returning accountable equipment.

When performing maintenance on USPS equipment, use the manufacturer’s handbook, if available, to ensure the minimum preventive measures required to keep USPS equipment operational are met. All MPO supervisors are responsible for making sure maintenance is performed. With the exception of meter heads, money order imprinters and Integrated Retail Terminal (IRT) equipment, local repair of equipment is authorized. When repairs cannot be made locally, coordination must be made with the serving JMPA to repair equipment such as meter bases and scales. Money Order imprinters must always be sent to the serving JMPA for repair. Postage meter heads must always be sent to the meter vendor. UNYSIS III IRT must be sent to Lockheed Martin IRT-CAC, 140 E Douglas Road, Oldsmar, FL, 34677-2979 by Express Mail®, or Registered Mail™ if Express Mail® service is not available. Whenever USPS accountable equipment is returned for repair (except for UNYSIS III IRT), PS Form 1590 and Maintenance Work Order Request, PS Form 4805, (Figure 25-3) must accompany the equipment. When sending the UNYSIS III IRT for repair, only PS Form 4805 must be completed and sent with the IRT. When mailing the IRT, an e-mail or Naval message must be sent to the serving JMPA listing the serial number of the IRT, description of problem(s), the Express Mail® or Registered Mail™ number under which the IRT was sent and date sent.

p. 650

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-4

Figure 25-2 — Example of a Requisition for Supplies, Services or Equipment, PS Form 7381.

p. 651

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-5

Figure 25-3 — Example of a Maintenance Work Order Request, PS Form 4805.

USPS NON-CAPITAL AND NON-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT AND EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES

The USPS also furnishes some non-accountable items. When non-accountable equipment is received at MPOs, it becomes the property of the Department of Defense (DOD). Non-accountable items need not be receipted for formally. However, to maintain property accountability, all non-accountable items received at MPOs should be entered in supply records as appropriate.

USPS Expendable Items

MPOs with more than one clerk assigned will designate an individual as the postal supply clerk in addition to carrying out regular duties. The supply clerk’s specific duties include receiving and issuing supplies, care and preservation of supplies, and the disposal and replacement of obsolete forms and supplies. Additional responsibilities include the monitoring of the stock levels of postal supplies to prevent overstocking and the requisitioning of items necessary to maintain postal operations. MPOs should normally maintain at least a 3-month level, but not more than a 5-month level of USPS expendable supplies on board. Refer to Appendix "B" of OPNAV Instruction 5112.6 (series) for the most commonly used forms and the recommended minimum and maximum quantities you should carry.

p. 652

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-6

Issuing Supplies

Issuing supplies is the responsibility of the designated postal supply clerk. When issuing supplies, enough should be issued to each section of the MPO to last at least a week at a time. When supplies are issued the balance on hand on Supply Record, PS Form 1586, (Figure 25-4) must be adjusted to reflect the current balance. You accomplish this by subtracting the quantity issued from the quantity shown on the “Balance on Hand” column.

Figure 25-4 — Example of PS Form 1586.

Determining What to Requisition

When do I order supplies? Order supplies when the amount of supplies reaches, or falls below, the minimum level required to be maintained on hand. Supply requisitions can be submitted at any time, but are normally prepared on a monthly basis. Supplies are ordered using a Material Distribution Center (MDC) Supply Requisition, PS Form 7380, filled-out in duplicate. Submit the original to the Material Distribution Center, Topeka, KS, and retain the duplicate copy in the post office files.

Requisitions are numbered consecutively beginning with number 1 on 1 October each year. Requisitions must be reviewed and signed by the MPO supervisor or the COPE. Complete PS Form 7380 as follows (Figure 25-5). Block 1: Type MPO supervisor or COPE along with the complete mailing address of your MPO. Block 2: Leave blank. Block 3: Enter your MPO finance number here. MPO ZIP Codes starting with 09XXX and 34XXX are assigned finance number 35-5825. MPO ZIP Codes starting with 96XXX are assigned finance number 05-6786.

p. 653

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-7

Block 4: Enter your MPO FEDSTRIP address code. The FEDSTRIP address is a six- character code that identifies each postal activity to which goods and billings are sent. Each Navy post office has a FEDSTRIP address code unique to their activity.

Block 5: Enter the Julian Date. The Julian Date is a 4-digit number that represents a specific date. The first digit represents the last number of the year; i.e., 9 of 2009. The next three numbers are a sequential number that represents a specific day of the year starting with 001 for 1 January through 365 for 31 December or 366 for 31 December on leap year. (See Tables 12-1 and 12-2 at the end of this chapter).

Block 6: Enter the requisition number. Number your requisitions consecutively beginning with number 1 on 1 October followed by the Fiscal Year (FY 2009) for example, 1-09, 2-09, etc.

Block 7: Enter the requisition page number 1 of 1 in this section. If more than one page is used, then enter 1 of 2, 2 of 2, etc.

Block 8: Enter the group of forms or items in numerical order.

Block 9: Enter the quantity requested. (Ensure that this quantity is the same as the quantity you entered on PS Form 1586 under the ORDER block).

Block 10: Enter the Unit of Issue; i.e., BK (Book), EA (Each), PD (Pad), etc. Block 11: Enter a brief description of the item (name of form or item). Blocks 12-14: Leave Blank.

Block 15: Mailing address of the Material Distribution Center is preprinted in this block. Block 16: Enter the name of the COPE or MPO Supervisor followed by their grade and title. Block 17: Signature of the COPE or MPO Supervisor and date signed. Blocks 18-20: Leave Blank.

p. 654

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-8

Figure 25-5 — Example of a completed MDC Supply Requisition, PS Form 7380.

Touch Tone Order Entry System (TTOES)

The USPS has a telephone ordering system called the "Touch Tone Order Entry System" or TTOES. The purpose of TTOES is to speed up order processing, provide immediate feedback on rejected items, and to reduce keypunch errors. TTOES is an excellent way to order new supply items or to replenish an item that is in short supply.

All new users are required to register before using the system. Once registered, you will receive a 10-digit access code (your area code and phone number). To place an order, simply call the 1-800 number provided by the USPS, and enter your 10-digit access code. Then the MDC will verify that the access code corresponds to your activity FEDSTRIP number. Once in the system, just follow the instructions provided (Figure 25-6). When placing an order, have the 13-digit National Stock Number

p. 655

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-9

(NSN) from USPS Publication 223 or 247, or the quick-pick number provided in the Postal Bulletin ready for the item(s) you are ordering.

Figure 25-6 — An example of the TTOES ordering instructions.

PS Formx DDDP, Express Mail®, Priority Mail and Global Priority Mail Order Form

Express Mail®, Priority Mail, and Global Mail supply items are ordered using PS Formx DDDP. Only those items listed on the form can be requisitioned. Prepare PS Formx DDDP in duplicate. Submit the original to the Express and Priority Mail Supply Center, USPS, PO Box 95001, Indianapolis, IN 46295-0001, and retain the duplicate in the post office files. These products also may be ordered via the Internet at the USPS Web site. When placing your first order, you will fill out an application online, which will establish your account. After the account is established, you only have to enter your user name and password when ordering Express Mail®, Priority Mail, and Global Priority Mail

p. 656

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-10

products. MPOs must submit their requisitions on a monthly basis after they have been reviewed by the MPO Supervisor or the COPE.

Emergency Requisitions

Emergency requisitions may be submitted when required by electronic message to MDC, Topeka, KS. These requisitions must be limited to ordering items for which there is an urgent need. The emergency requisition message should be in the same format as PS Form 7380, and it should include the MPO FEDSTRIP code, the finance number, and the statement of justification. Attempt to obtain needed items from local sources before you submit an emergency requisition.

The emergency requisition message should be used by shore-based overseas activities or mobile units on deployment only. Shipboard post offices in CONUS homeport should use TTOES, instead of a message, when ordering supplies.

RECEIVING USPS POSTAL SUPPLIES

The MDC usually will fill requisitions within 24 hours after receipt. The supplies requisitioned will be enclosed in a shipping container along with a shipping order, which, is a computer printout invoice indicating the action taken by the distribution center (Figure 25-7).

Once supplies are received at your MPO, do the following:

• Check the supplies received against the shipping order and your post office copy of PS Form 7380 to ensure that all items requisitioned were received. When an item is not received and the shipping order does not reflect the reason for non-shipment, report the discrepancy to the MDC by memo or call the 1-800 telephone number provided on the shipping order to check the order status. If submitting a memo, provide a copy of the PS Form 7380 from your post office files and a copy of the shipping order that was sent to you with the shipment. Record the discrepancy for that particular item on PS Form 1586

• On the appropriate PS Form 1586 annotate the amount of supply items received. Refer to (Figure 25-4) discussed previously. Upon completion, file the shipping order in your post office files.

Figure 25-7 — An example of an MDC Shipping Order.

p. 657

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-11

SUPPLY STORAGE

Supplies should be maintained in an area designated for storage of postal supplies. Your post office supplies are expected to last a given length of time. If you are wasteful, or fail to store supplies properly, your stock level may become depleted to the extent that postal operations are hampered. A well-organized storage area permits easy access to supplies. Therefore, supply clerks should establish a location numbering system to aid in locating each item. At a large shore-based MPO, such as a Fleet Mail Center (FMC), space should be allocated for the storage of large volumes of supplies. At a small shipboard MPO, a filing cabinet may serve this purpose.

Monitoring Supplies

Supply clerks monitor supplies using PS Form 1586. A separate PS Form 1586 is maintained for each USPS or Navy supply item. PS Form 1586 must reflect the following:

• The appropriate PS (or Navy) item/form number

• National Stock Number

• A brief (item/form) description

• Unit of issue

• Source of supply

• Maximum and minimum levels

• Balance on hand

• Quantity issued, received, and ordered.

Information on the ordering of supplies can be found in USPS Publications 223, 247 and OPNAVINST 5112.6 series.

NOTE

The maximum and minimum levels will be entered in pencil to allow for adjustment when requirements change. Occasionally, the USPS introduces a new item that deletes another item. As supply clerk for your MPO, ensure that changes are annotated in the post office copy of USPS Publication 223 and on PS Form 1586. These changes listed in the Postal Bulletin that your office receives on a bi-weekly basis.

Inventory Control

Inventory control establishes the minimum and maximum stock quantity. By maintaining an accurate stock level, you will have sufficient USPS postal supply items available at all times and will not run out. As a minimum, postal supplies are inventoried on a semi-annual basis (during the months of January and July). Inventories help determine if supply records are accurate, if established minimum and maximum levels need to be adjusted, and if supplies need to be ordered. The inventory count is

p. 658

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-12

recorded on PS Form 1586. MPOs should maintain at least a 3-month but not more than a 5-month level of supplies. Consider the amount of time that it takes to receive supplies from the Material Distribution Center. If you are stationed aboard ship and are deployed, ensure that you have enough postal supplies to last at least five months.

REQUISITIONING SPECIAL SUPPLY ITEMS

There are certain items that are not requisitioned on PS Form 7380. These items are unique, and normally the USPS or a contractor must manufacture them specially.

Special Order Rubber Stamps and Rubber Postmarking and Canceling Stamps

Special order rubber stamps should be ordered on Requisition for Rubber and Steel Hand Canceling Stamps, PS Form 1567, only, from the applicable JMPA. These rubber stamps are ordered only for use in association with official postal business. Individualized special rubber stamps Navy post offices may need to order are the following:

• Postal Finance Officer (PFO)

• COPE

• Postal Officer

• Directory Service stamps.

Rubber stamps should be requisitioned on PS Form 1567 (Figure 25-8). All information required on PS Form 1567, should be entered on the form. When ordering rubber postmarking and canceling stamps, and rubber all-purpose dating stamps (refer to USPS Pub 247), type or write the information that you would like on the stamps in the impression and description block of PS Form1567. Requisitions should be submitted to the appropriate JMPA for processing.

p. 659

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-13

Figure 25-8 — Example PS Form 1567.

Facing Slips and Slide Labels

Preprinted facing slips and slide labels are used to identify the contents of a mail tray, bundle, or pouch of mail. The data to be printed should conform to the format and content as outlined in USPS Handbook PO-423, Requisitioning Labels. Requisitions for preprinted facing slips and slide labels should be submitted using Requisitions for Facing Slips or Slide Labels, PS Form 1578-B, in duplicate for military post offices not serviced by a GBS facility. Send PS Form 1578-B to the following address:

p. 660

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-14

US POSTAL SERVICE LABELING PRINTING CENTER 500 SW MONTARA PKWY TOPEKA KS 66624-9502

Prepare PS Form 1578-B as follows (Figure 25-9). Header Data:

Columns 1 through 9: Enter the MPO ZIP + 4 numbers.

Columns 13 and 14: Enter the two-digit character code for the item you are ordering. Columns 18 through 23: Enter the MPO finance number. Columns 24 through 49: Enter FPO, postmaster of address designation, and the nine -digit MPO number. Shipboard post offices should enter the name and hull number of the ship.

Columns 58 and 59: Enter the total number of pages, (i.e., 1 of 1, 1 of 2). Detail Data Lines: Columns 8 through 12: Enter the quantity of labels and facing slips requested in multiples of 300.

Columns 13 through 33: Enter the destination information in this block. Use standard abbreviations from the Postal Operations Manual (POM) and ensure format is in compliance with the requirements found in the DMM. For empty equipment label orders (non -defective and defective), put “EMPTY EQUIPMENT” in these blocks.

Columns 34 through 38: Enter the destination ZIP Code (3 or 5 digits).

Columns 42 through 64: Enter the contents identification description such as, First Class Mail (FCM) or LETTERS AND FLATS, etc.

Columns 65 through 67: Enter the three-letter air stop code. These identify destination airports such as JFK.

Total bulk column: Enter the total number of facing slips or slide labels requested.

Phone number column: Enter your MPO’s area code and phone number. Label clerk column: Enter the Supply Petty Officer’s name. Reviewed by MSC/Division column: Signature of Postal Officer or MPO supervisor.

p. 661

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-15

Figure 25-9 — Example PS Form 1578-B.

Preprinted Tags and Labels

Preprinted military tags and labels must be requisitioned from the USPS on an as-needed basis. A Request for Military Label and Tag Request, PS Form 1957-D, used to order PS Labels 135, 135B, 135C, 135E, 136, 136B, 136C, and 135E (Figure 25-11) must be submitted via AMPS (Figure 25-10). If AMPS is not available submit written forms to the following: MILITARY MAIL OPERATIONS 475 L'ENFANT PLAZA SW 8TH FL RM 370 WASHINGTON DC 20260-7103

p. 662

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-16

No more than a three month supply of tags and labels should be requisitioned. The postal supply clerk must ensure that the quantities requested are in multiples of 1,000 only. Non-receipt of requisitions within 60 days from submission of the requisition must be reported to MPSA-OP. Provide a copy of the requisition when reporting non-receipt.

Figure 25-10 — Screen Shot of AMPS, Example PS Form 1957 online.

p. 663

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-17

Figure 25-11 — Example PS Form 1957.

DISPOSITION OF USPS EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

Capital and sensitive equipment that is not needed by an operational MPO should be reported by Naval message to the serving JMPA for coordination of return with the USPS. The message should identify the equipment by description, item number, quantity and serial number. In addition, any available information regarding an existing need at another shipboard MPO or shore-based MPO should be included in the message. This action should be coordinated with the MACOM Postal Officer, as appropriate.

p. 664

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-18

When capital or sensitive equipment is processed according to disposition instructions received from the appropriate JMPA, a new Supplies and Equipment Receipt, PS Form 1590, should be completed via AMPS.

Non-capital and non-sensitive equipment determined to be in excess should be reported to the MACOM Postal Officer and disposed of in accordance with their instructions. All other items, such as forms, labels, tags, and regular supply items, should be transferred to another MPO or destroyed. An exception to the above procedure applies if the postal activity is located in CONUS. In that case, all excess items are returned to the local serving post office.

When a MPO is closed or deactivated, the procedures in the previous paragraphs apply in disposing of all USPS capital and sensitive equipment, DOD non-capital and non-sensitive equipment, and all other postal supplies. A message will be provided by the MACOM with specific instructions on the disposition of locally needed supply items. The Postal Officer and/or the COPE should be aware constantly of the condition of USPS equipment assigned to their areas of responsibility.

Table 25-1 — Julian Date Calendar— Perpetual (Non Leap Years Use in 2010, 2011, 2013, 2014, 2015 etc.).

p. 665

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-19

Table 25-2 — Julian Date Calendar—L eap Years (For Leap Years Only - Use In 2012, 2016, 2020, 2024 etc.).

p. 666

LS: Chapter 25— Postal Equipment and Supplies Rev. MAR 2013 25-20

(This page was left blank intentionally).

p. 667

Rev. MAR 2013 26-1

CHAPTER 26

OFFICIAL MAIL

Official mail is any letter, publication, parcel or other mailable item relating exclusively to the business of the U.S. Government. Navy commands use commercial postage meters, postage stamps, computer generated postage, and credit cards to prepay postage on letters, flats, publications, or parcels, etc.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Recall the procedures for establishing and managing a command Official Mail Cost Control Program (OMCCP), including accountability requirements and treatment of official mail

2. Recall the procedures for obtaining postage stamps, computer generated postage, and postage meters; and their accounting procedures.

3. Recall the procedures for processing claims on official mail

4. Recall the procedures for preparing and processing official mail for dispatch

NAVY OFFICIAL MAIL COST CONTROL PROGRAM (NOMCCP)

The overall goal of the Navy Official Mail Cost Control Program (NOMCCP) is to reduce official mail costs. This is accomplished through cost-effective use of the U.S. Postal Service (USPS), Department of Defense (DoD) Official Intra-Theater Mail, guard mail, and alternate carriers such as Federal Express (FEDEX), or United Parcel Service (UPS). Consolidating mail to as many locations as possible is another way whereby the Navy has reduced postage costs.

In October of 1994, the Navy converted to commercial postage and decentralized payment for postage down to the user level. The Navy then achieved positive accountability and control of the NOMCCP by requiring host installations and Navy Working Capital Fund commands to budget for their postage expenditures (pay as they go) and by monitoring or surveying outgoing and incoming official mail for proper preparation and correct postage. The Navy achieves positive accountability and control by ensuring that each command has an OMCCP and an appointed Official Mail Manager (OMM) to oversee the program.

The DoD Official Mail Management, DODI 4525.08 and DoD Official Mail Manual, DoD 4525.8-M, which are supplemented by the Navy Official Mail Management Program, OPNAVINST 5218.7 (series) providing the necessary guidelines for Navy commands to establish a viable official mail cost control program and to establish a viable OMCCP.

Every Navy command must have a command OMCCP to review mailing practices. The purpose of this program is to ensure official mailings are prepared and processed efficiently, in a timely manner, and at the least, cost based on mission needs as directed by the following:

• USPS regulations

CHAPTER 26

p. 668

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-2

• The Navy Official Mail Management Program, OPNAVINST 5218.7 (series), supplements policies and procedures outlined in the DoD Official Mail Management, DODI 4525.08 and DoD Official Mail Manual, DOD 4525.8-M,. In addition, it emphasizes the use of the class of mail, as well as special and supplemental postal services that meet the security, accountability, and delivery requirements of the material being shipped at the most economical cost to the Government

• The DoD Official Mail Manual, DoD 4525.8-M, provides information and guidelines for implementing the DOD OMCCP. This manual also explains control and safeguard procedures for postage meters and postage stamps

• The DoD Official Mail Management Instruction, DoD Official Mail Management, DoDI 4525.08, establishes basic DoD Official Mail Management policies, the requirement for appointing Official Mail Managers (OMMs), describes their duties, and prescribes uniform procedures for DoD official mail

• Command Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) for official mail.

Other publications and related items used in the official mail program are as follows:

• USPS Domestic Mail Manual (DMM). The DMM is the primary USPS manual used in mail operations. It contains regulations of direct interest to mailers such as postage rates, mail classifications, and mail preparation guidelines. It must be used at each official mail acceptance site. The activity’s OMM and host commander’s activity OMM also must have access to a DMM

• USPS International Mail Manual (IMM). The IMM contains regulations, classifications, and other guidelines for mailing between the United States and foreign countries. This publication is required only where international mail is frequently accepted

• USPS Postal Bulletin. This bi-weekly publication provides updates to the DMM and IMM, as well as other information on mail-related items

• Postage Rates and Fees, USPS Notice 123, Price List. This poster is used at each location where domestic and international postage rates are calculated

• Postal Zone Chart. This chart lists the zones in which the various ZIP Codes are located in relation to your local mailing address. Use this chart at each location where postage rates are calculated.

When the publications and instructions mentioned are on hand, operating and control procedures can be established to ensure that official mail is delivered, processed, and dispatched correctly. An official mail program also must include proper safeguards and security controls to prevent the depredation of official mail or the compromise of any classified material. Guidance on these issues is contained in DoD Official Mail Management, DoDI 4525.08, DoD Official Mail Manual, DoD 4525.8-M, and Navy Official Mail Management Program, OPNAVINST 5218.7 (series).

In addition to the required publications, instructions, and notices, your command’s official mail acceptance site will need an electronic scale to weigh articles to determine the amount of postage required on outgoing official mail.

Be aware of unauthorized uses of official mail. Ensure that you notify the OMM of all incidents of unexplained missing, misdirected, or delayed official mail.

p. 669

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-3

Appointment of Official Mail Managers (OMMS)

Every Command must appoint an OMM. Commanders also may appoint an assistant OMM to perform the OMM's duties in his or her absence. OMMs must be military E-6 or above, or a DoD civilian, GS-6 or higher. This requirement is waived only when the command concerned has no personnel in the grades specified. The OMM appointment may be a collateral duty assignment. The Commander must make the appointment by official letter. Include the appointee’s official address, e-mail address, and telephone number in the letter. Copies of OMM Designation Letters must be distributed to the Host Installation OMM and a copy must be retained in the OMM’s files.

Direct Accountability

Direct accountability is a term with which everyone in the Navy is familiar. The Navy, like all the other branches of the military services, is directly responsible for controlling, managing, and accounting for each postal dollar spent. The Navy’s total annual postage cost for official mailings in fiscal year 2009 was approximately 12 million dollars. Since postage rates continue to rise, it is important to ensure strict control of the use of official mail.

Treatment of Official Mail

Official mail must conform to the weight, size, and shape requirements for the class of mail being used. All official mail must be treated as First-Class Mail, unless it is endorsed for a lower class. The exception is that pieces exceeding the weight limits of First-Class Mail must be treated as Parcel Post unless endorsed as PRIORITY. Refer to the DMM for size and weight restrictions. Official mail endorsed to indicate Extra Services must be given the service indicated. Official mail sent to International addresses must conform to the size and weight limits and restrictions of the country to which they are addressed. Refer to the IMM when Official mail is sent to International addresses. A return address is required on all official mail. The words “DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY” must be above the return address, and the words “OFFICIAL BUSINESS” below the return address. All addresses and return addresses must have a ZIP + 4 Code.

Example of Proper Address Format:

TITLE OF OFFICIAL IN CHARGE Commander

OPTIONAL LINE U.S. Fleet Forces Command

NAME OF ACTIVITY DELIVERY 1562 Mitscher Avenue Suite 250

ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP+4 CODE Norfolk, VA 23551-2487

Extra Services

The Department of the Navy has placed certain limitations on the use of Extra Services in the transmission of official mail as follows:

Registered Mail™ should be used only for the transmission of the following types of materials:

• Classified material as required by SECNAVINST 5510.36 (series)

• Service records, medical records, and records of courts-martial

• High-value items that are one-of-a-kind, irreplaceable, sensitive, controlled, rare or pilferable, and items having a replacement value in excess of $20,000.

p. 670

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-4

Items required by law, regulation, or other government agency rules with which the Navy must comply:

• Criminal investigation evidence

• Cash, original vouchers (disbursement and collection) and voided or cancelled checks

• Mailable shipments of government owned firearms*

• Commercial transportation tickets, boarding passes, and Air Mobility Command authorizations

• Environmental samples*

• Notification of radiation exposure*

• Mailing former criminal evidence to its owner*

• Mobilization pre-assignment orders to international addresses where this service is authorized*

* Use of a USPS Return Receipt is authorized for these items.

Insured mail is used only for motion pictures sent from or to the Navy Motion Picture Exchange Command.

No other Extra Services are used in conjunction with insured mail. Mail sent registered will not be insured.

Certified mail will be used only for the following:

• Confidential material to facilities cleared for access to classified information under the DoD Industrial Security Program or to any non-DoD agency of the Executive Branch

• Letters to establishments being declared “off limits”

• Adverse enlisted and officer efficiency reports and other similar actions

• Controlled test material

• Instructional material marked “For Faculty Use Only”.

Items requiring shipment by Priority Mail when the certified fee is less than the fee for other services, which provide proof of delivery:

• Equal employment opportunity case material mailed to complainants and their representatives

• Reduction in force notices sent to civilian employees on authorized absence

• Final decisions of a Contracting Officer issued under the dispute clause of a government contract

• Show cause or cure notices issued under the default clause of a government contract

• Any other communication for which receipt is essential to create or preserve rights granted to the United States under a government contract

• Debarment letters

• Delayed entry packages

• Summonses and subpoenas

p. 671

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-5

• Adverse personnel actions for military and civilian personnel

• Illegally held identification cards

• Traffic or driving violations

• Letters of revocation or suspension of installation driving privileges

• Dishonored checks (not applicable to non- appropriated fund instrumentalities)

• Questions to injured persons

• Records of trial for all Special and General Courts Martial

• Decisions of the courts of military review

• Officer elimination cases.

Any other communication, receipt of which is essential to create or preserve the rights granted to the U.S. Government in connection with criminal proceedings.

Return receipts will be used only when proof of delivery of official mail to a non-government addressee is required. If proof of delivery to another government agency is required, an internal receipt, Record of Receipt, OPNAV Form 5511/10 (Figure 26-1) is used and the addressee is instructed to acknowledge the receipt of the mailing by completing the form and returning it immediately.

Figure 26-1 — An example of an OPNAV Form 5511/10.

Express Mail

Express Mail is the class of mail afforded the highest priority in handling and provides highly reliable service. Express Mail shall be used only when it is the most cost-effective way to accomplish a mission within time, security, and accountability constraints. It shall not be used as follows:

• To respond to directed actions or requests for information unless using it is the only way to meet a short suspense

p. 672

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-6

• To correct administrative oversights, such as a late suspense when adequate time existed to meet a deadline

• On days before weekends or holidays, unless the sender has verified that someone will be available to accept the item being sent and work on it during the weekend or holiday.

Express Mail service is authorized to be used by Official Mail Managers for the purpose of forwarding Navy Advancement Exams to the NETPDTC in Pensacola FL. Deployed Ships will address their advancement exam answer sheets to the nearest Fleet Mail Center and send it via Registered Mail™ to the Postal Officer, marked “Advancement Exam Answer Sheets Enclosed.” After receipt of the article, the Official Mail Manager forwards the unopened Envelope via Express Mail to its final destination.

Military Ordinary Mail

Military Ordinary Mail (MOM) is official mail sent by the DoD at the Parcel Post postage rates that requires faster service than sealift transportation to, from and in between overseas Military Post Office (MPO) areas. MOM service provides for the airlift of those official articles that qualify for and are endorsed MOM. The MOM endorsement is in addition to any other endorsements on the article and will be placed on the address side of the article.

Balloting Materials

Another type of official mail that you may handle is absentee balloting material. Members of the military services on active duty, and DoD civilian personnel and their dependents use these materials. Other U.S. citizen civilian personnel in a foreign country also may deposit balloting material at MPOs even though they may not be authorized other postal privileges. All printing on balloting material is printed in red for easy identification. Postage is not placed on these mailings. All balloting material is postmarked with a cancellation device to show date of mailing.

DOD Official Intra-Theater Mail

The DoD intra-theater mail service permits all Outside the Continental United States (OCONUS) activities to send correspondence and materials to other APOs/FPOs within the same geographical area at no cost to the government. Extra services are used on DoD Official Intra-Theater Mail with the same restrictions as other mail. However, DoD Official Intra-Theater mail must never be allowed to enter USPS or international mail systems. Mail should be endorsed using the acronym DODOIM, (DoD Official Intra-Theater Mail) in the upper-right-hand corner where postage is placed.

Ships and embarked mobile units deployed within a particular theater—f or example, Pacific, European, and North Atlantic—a re eligible to use this service for the duration of their stay within the theatre. Items that become undeliverable for ships/units that have departed the theater for CONUS must not be forwarded for delivery through the USPS but should be returned to the sender. All privileges, requirements, and priorities applicable to items in the Military Postal System (MPS) apply to DoD Official Intra-Theater Mail. This includes protection and security against theft and depredation, adherence to service standards, protection from unauthorized search-and-seizure procedures, and compliance with customs requirements.

p. 673

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-7

OBTAINING AND ACCOUNTING FOR POSTAGE

The size of your unit or command determines the type of postage used, such as postage stamps, computer-generated postage, postage meter, or credit card, and the type of accounting procedures you will use.

Postage Stamps

Postage stamps are used by small-volume mailers throughout the Navy. Small-volume mailers most likely have an outgoing official mail volume too low to justify having postage metering equipment and are unable to use the services of a Consolidated Mail Facility (CMF).

Shore activities without a second (backup) postage metering system may maintain a 10-day emergency supply of postage stamps. The emergency supply of stamps is used when metering equipment is not operational.

Audits

The command monies audit board must audit monthly postage stamp stock used for official mail, such as fixed credit accounts issued by the Postal Finance Officer (PFO). The audit should be performed by two or more members of the board following the same basic guidelines as for a fixed credit account.

The auditors must do a complete audit of all postage stamps and stamped paper on hand. Stamps on hand as of the last monthly audit

The audit sheet is filed in the official mail files and is retained for two years (Figure 26-2).

p. 674

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26-0fficial Mail

Type of account D PFO Account D Clerk Account IAudit Type 0 Montllly 0 Diller (r e SpecralAudit, 0 COPE Account 0 Ouanelly Acrount TUtnover) Nll!Tl9 ol ClerkiOerk 10 No FPO Numbef SFANo Trne and Date ol Aud1t

NDme of AudrtOI'S UniiName

Summary of Acxountablflty Cuh and Cuh Items on Hand (1\l!ath a prolimmry Form 1412 rf applrcabfe) 1 TotalCeah andCuh Item. on Hand Col I Col II Denomr- Ou8nl!ly Amooot (IJne 33) nation Add Bacll Paid Out Items (DI$bui'"Hfl'l8lm}: 2 Refunds $1()() 00 3 Oilier S5000 4 Oilier $20_00

5 01ller Tol2 thr\J S.Coll S1000

6 Cash Tho! Wos Avartable Before 1 + 5Colll $500 Pard Outs Compel te Bloclls 7-16 If Bu.el"" a was $200 Conducted Prior to Aud 7 f,IQrley Order Vouchers 8 Forms 3544 S100

9. COOTogs

0.50

10 Cus!Omef Meters, Forms 3603

11.Postage Meter/PVI (Form 3602-PO.'Current Reodrng) 12.Box RentDis, Forms 1538

0.25

010

0Jl5

I 3 Retail Padlag1ng Prod.Jds

0 01

14 Money 0n1e1 Fees 26.Total Cash 27.ToiOI Per.;onaJ I 15 Other BUSineSS Checks 28.Tollll Government 16 Other To7l ll1ru 16 Col I Ched<s 29 Tolal Paid Money I7 Cash PQrtloo of Stlmp Credit 6 - 16 Col II Orders 30.Tolal Travele(s 18 Sta/ll> Stodc OS Counted Checks 31 Tolal Credt I Debit I 19 FIXed Advtloced CnKits 10 Clerk PPC Card Receipts flex·Unit 14 12 Clerlt B<rlances 20 Stod< in Transit (Nol applicable 10 clerks) Tot 18111ru 20 Col I 32.Other (/Je$CIIbe) (Returned but Ill tal*y) 21 Tollll Cash, StompS & Advanced Tol 17+20 Colli 33.Total Ce-lh (Total Credits (FIXed) or Clerk Balances (Flex) 26111ru 32) 22 Open Balance t O) •Ret. JAJCJ53{l floo<J PS 3369 advanced from PFO (FIXed) 23.D1lference 21- 22Colll OVerage/Shortage APOS 24 Amount of Toloranco tor thrs Cred

25 Adioo Taken \Yhen Out ol Toleronce O Trust 0 Suspense O Form571 -

Figure 26-2 -Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary.

Postage Meters

Postage meters provide a means of achieving positive accountability by imprinting the exact amount of the postage paid directly on an envelope or on a postage meter tape that is affixed to the mailing

Rev_ MAR 2013 26-8

p. 675

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-9

piece. The meter records the value of the postage paid on official mailings. Postage meters may not be owned. They must be leased from an authorized manufacturer. A license is required from the USPS before a postage meter can be leased to a command. The license identifies the civil or MPO where the postage meter is registered and the location and the model number of the meter.

Navy commands using postage meters are required to use the remote Computerized Meter Resetting System (CMRS). CMRS allows the Navy mail centers and other postage metering sites (to include Navy ships) to add postage to their electronic or digital meters over the phone. To establish a CMRS account, the command OMM contacts their local meter manufacturer’s representative and explains that the command wants to establish a CMRS account. The meter manufacturer establishes the account and provides a 1-800 number for the purpose of adding postage on the meter.

Deposits of funds to CMRS accounts must be done by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT). When additional postage is required to be set on postage meters, the command OMM calls the meter manufacturer’s 1-800 number. Postage is initially set on the meter, and then the meter is reset each quarter for the estimated amount of postage to be used during the quarter. Because CMRS meters electronically record meter register readings, commands are not required manually to record daily ascending and descending readings. System-generated reports received from the meter vendor after transactions are made can serve as a substitute for manual records and must be available for review by the command OMM and by inspectors.

Postage Metering Systems

Postage-metering systems consist of a mailing machine, electronic scale, an electronic interface between the machine and scale, an accumulator, and the postage meter.

The electronic scale in most cases weighs mail in 1/2-ounce increments up to 70 pounds. It computes the required postage electronically. The interface sends the required postage electronically to the metering and mailing machine. Then the interface either prints the meter imprint directly on the envelope or produces a tape with the meter imprint on it.

The accumulator is a piece of electronic accounting equipment that is connected to the scale. It records all mailings, and each command, tenant activity, department, division, or office can be assigned a separate account number. The operator can print out information gathered in the accumulator for management use in analyzing and controlling official postage costs.

Inspections

Adherence to official mail management regulations, policies, and procedures is accomplished under the control of the Navy Command Inspection Program, SECNAVINST 5040.3 (series).

Component Headquarters, MACOMs, and intermediate commands must conduct internal headquarters OMM inspections at least once a year. Inspections of subordinate installations and activities must be conducted at least every 3 years. These inspections can be combined with other inspections.

Installation or equivalent OMMs will inspect all subordinate activities, and tenant activities annually. These inspection reports will be made available for review during MACOM and Inspector General inspections. Subordinate, and tenant activities must keep all previous inspection reports on file for a period of three years.

p. 676

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-10

Checklist OPNAV 5218/6 Official Mail Center/Unit Mailroom Inspection Checklist shall be used for inspections. This form is available from Naval Form Online. Ensure that you understand the references shown at the end of each inspection item listed on the form. To control DON official mail costs, maintain a viable OMCCP, and prepare for inspections. All OMMs must do the following on a recurring basis:

• Ensure that official mail users know when and how to contact their OMM

• Supervise mailing practices

• Report any misuse of official mail to Commanding Officers of alleged violators

• Set up controls on postal expenses to create a cost-effective mail management program. Command OMMs are required to do the following: • Keep commanders informed of the effectiveness of the OMCCP and any problem areas

• Supervise the command’s OMCCP

• Annually contact, provide assistance, guidance, training, and discuss mailing requirements with activities within their jurisdiction that produce forms, publications, and periodicals. Keep records of these discussions to make future inspections easier

• Inspect incoming mail at least once a week and report deficiencies to the originating command’s OMM. Inspect outgoing mail at least once a week at the final preparation point to; (1) decide who needs additional training and what policies and procedures need more emphasis, and (2) make sure outgoing official mail containing errors or deficiencies in preparation is returned for correction

• Review spoiled postage meter tapes and establish procedures to reduce their occurrence and ensure proper disposition has been made of them

• Analyze the use of postage and use the results to make the command’s official mail program more cost-effective.

Coordinate with supporting supply and procurement activities to ensure postal-related items being procured, such as envelopes, cards, and labels meet standards outlined in the following:

• USPS regulations

• DOD Official Mail Manual, DOD 4525.8-M

• Navy Official Mail Management Program, OPNAVINST 5218.7 (series).

• Your command’s postal SOP. Know who the command's USPS account representative and other appropriate USPS officials are. When possible, belong to the local USPS sponsored Postal Customer Council (PCC) and attend meetings. The OMM should consider starting a PCC if one does not exist in the area.

CLAIMS AND INQUIRIES

The Government Losses in Shipment Act (Title 40, United States Code, Section 726) and the government’s general self-insurance policy prohibit federal agencies from using registered and insured mail for the sole or primary purpose of obtaining postal indemnity.

p. 677

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-11

Do not process claims against the USPS for indemnity on official mail items lost or damaged in the mail. The Comptroller General of the United States Decision B-114874, of 13 October 1978, allows the government to use Registered or Insured Mail only to obtain the added protection or proof of delivery offered by these special postal services.

Keep in mind the information just discussed. Remember that we can trace official mail only by using a USPS claim or inquiry form. There will be no actual mail claims for lost, damaged, or rifled official mail. A mail tracer can be completed and used to try to locate missing or rifled official mail or the tracer form may be used to document damage to official mail. The various post offices that may have received the lost mail should receive the tracer form as an inquiry.

When the contents of a package are known to have been rifled, file a tracer immediately. For lost official mail, allow sufficient time for the article to be delivered before filing a tracer. There are minimum and maximum time limits applicable to filing tracers for lost mail sent to the United States or to APO-FPO addresses. (Refer to the DMM or POM for these time limits.) Remember that the missing official mail may have been misrouted or accidentally sent to another address. So allow time for the missing official mail to reach its final destination.

Always use the proper USPS claim (tracer) form(s) for the following:

• For lost or rifled insured and Registered Mail™, use PS Form 1000

• For rifled ordinary mail, use PS Form 673

• For Express Mail, use PS Form 1000.

PREPARATION AND PROCESSING

Preparing and processing mail is the first step in the official mail delivery cycle and involves the following:

• Preparation by the office(s) sending the mail

• Consolidation by the office(s) sending the mail or the Consolidated Mail Facility (CMF) or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch

• Collection, by the post office, CMF, or other mail acceptance site that will prepare the mail for dispatch

• Postmarking, by the post office, CMF, or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch

• Classifying, such as First-Class, Priority, or Package Services, as decided by the office sending the mail, or the CMF, or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch

• Sorting, by the post office, CMF, or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch

• Pouching, by the post office, CMF, or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch

• Traying, by the post office, CMF, or other mail acceptance site that prepares the mail for dispatch.

p. 678

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-12

Preparation

USPS reserves the right to refuse improperly prepared mail. Official mail acceptance sites also must return all outgoing official mail to the sender when an address is not formatted correctly. To avoid having USPS return an article to the sender, personnel who accept articles for mailing must be familiar with USPS addressing requirements. All mail must be prepared according to the instructions provided by the USPS in the Designing Letter Mail, USPS Publication 25, the DMM, or the IMM, as appropriate.

The ultimate goal of the USPS and the MPS is to speed the delivery of mail. To meet USPS automation requirements, addresses on official mail must be typed or printed in uppercase letters and should not contain any punctuation except for the hyphen in the ZIP + 4 Code. Delivery and return addresses must be limited to five lines and be formatted with a uniform left margin with each line limited to a maximum of 47 characters per line, including spaces.

Inadequate packaging is the most common cause for loss and damage in the mails. Ensure that the contents of the items being mailed are wrapped and packaged to withstand the mail-handling process and the transportation environment, and are wrapped and packaged in a manner that will not cause harm to mail handling personnel, equipment, or other mail. Train all mail handling personnel who prepare articles for mailing to do the following:

• Use inexpensive, lightweight, sturdy cartons or shipping containers capable of protecting the item being mailed

• Pack items in a stronger outer container when possible

• Place the address label on top of the package and make sure the label is easy to read and understand

• Ensure that the address label contains the complete delivery and return addresses with no punctuation except the hyphen in the ZIP + 4 Codes

• Provide proper mail classification endorsements, appropriate special service markings, or other important instructions correctly on the address label or address side of the package.

Individual consolidated mail shipments must be packaged in accordance with the requirements in the DMM. "Other than First-Class Mail" may be combined with "First-Class Mail" only when it is cost-effective to do so. Large paper envelopes or cartons may have the address and postage placed on the container or an address label. If a label is used, the postage meter tape or postage stamps must overlap the upper right edge of the label. The words consolidated mail or the letters CM must be placed immediately below the return address. Consolidated mail containers are to be opened and sorted at the receiving mail center or in the addressee’s correspondence distribution center.

Consolidation

Consolidation is to combine in one container two or more pieces of mail directed to the same addressee or installation on the same day. That one container is then sent to the addressee as one piece of mail. The container may be a bag, envelope, box, or pouch that will hold two or more pieces of mail. Consolidated mail is a reliable way to ship administrative and operational communications or logistical items between headquarters, depots, contractors, installations, and operational units. The mail remains intact while in transit, which reduces the number of times that the contents are sorted. Consolidating mail also reduces the chances of misrouted and delayed mail.

Consolidation reduces costs because the postage is paid on the total weight of the consolidated container. Postage is not paid on each separate piece of mail within the container. Under the postage

p. 679

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-13

rate structure, the first pound is the most expensive. As the weight increases, the cost-per-pound decreases. The cost and weight of the container and of any packaging material must be considered in the mailing cost. Consolidated mail reduces the number of individual official mailings and thus the Navy’s overall postage costs.

To make the most of consolidation, each command must designate one office to process all outgoing mail. At small commands, this can be the command administrative office. Shore commands with large supply departments are authorized to designate two offices for processing outgoing mail. One can be for processing outgoing administrative type of official mailings and the other can be for processing outgoing logistics type of official mailings.

Once control of official mail is established, cost-savings will be realized. Frequently survey outgoing mail to identify those addressees for whom several pieces of mail normally are generated. Set up groups of separate holding slots, boxes, or bins for those repeat addressees. This will allow a basic structure for consolidating outgoing mail. At a set time, just before final mail closeout each day, consolidate the mail generated for repeat addresses. Consolidate by class of mail into the minimum number of official mailings possible. At large-shore activities, or in other areas where several Naval commands are located, consider assigning one office to act as a single point of consolidation for all outgoing official mail. The goal of consolidating official mail is to save the Navy resources and money. Most Navy commands consolidate official mail, but there still may be a few areas requiring further attention.

Collection

Official mail must not be deposited in collection boxes. The Postal Officer must advise personnel in the command that official mail must be collected from unit mail orderlies or clerks who work in the office that applies postage on the mail.

Deliver official mail found in mail collection boxes to the local OMM for further disposition. The OMM must return the official mail to the office personnel who put the mail in the ordinary mail collection box. The OMM should then decide if office personnel dealing with official mail require further training in official mail procedures.

Postmarking

Official mail bearing postage stamps must be postmarked along with ordinary outgoing mail. Do not postmark mail deposited after the last scheduled collection until the following day. Postmark missent official mail on the back to show the date received before dispatching it to its final destination.

Sorting

Official mail is sorted, bundled, and dispatched with other outgoing mail. Handle official mail the same as other outgoing ordinary mail, provided that the official mail has no extra services added or is not Registered Mail™. As discussed previously, Registered Mail™ is handled with more security than is ordinary mail. Incorrectly, sorting or pouching mail will result in mail delays. Adhering strictly to proper procedures is very important and helps prevent unnecessary mail delays.

Mail Classification

The class of mail service selected for Navy official mail should meet the security, accountability, and delivery requirements of the material being shipped.

p. 680

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-14

Compute the postage and fees for domestic mail according to the DMM. Use USPS Notice 123, Price List with the Postal Zone Chart for the post office to which the item will be mailed. Figure the postage and fees for international mail according to the IMM, and USPS Notice 123, Price List. Properly programmed electronic scales may be used to compute postage and fees.

Items mailed from one overseas MPO to another overseas MPO in the same theater must have the words DoD Official Intra-Theater Mail or DODOIM placed in the area where the postage is usually affixed. The words DOD Official Intra-Theater Mail or DODOIM can be typed, rubber stamped, or mechanically printed.

First-Class Mail may be used for mailing the following:

• Official handwritten or typewritten material

• For items required by USPS regulations to be sent at the First-Class rate of postage. Refer to the DMM for weight restrictions

• Material less periodicals (including newsletters) and newspapers that cannot be mailed more economically at a lower class or rate of postage.

Priority Mail may be used for mailing the following:

• Official handwritten or typewritten material

• Items required by USPS regulations to be sent at the Priority Mail rate of postage. Refer to the DMM for weight restrictions

• High-priority shipments, such as Non-Mission Capable Supplies (NMCS), Partially Mission Capable Supplies (PMCS), Casualty Report (CASREP), Ships’ Essential Equipment Requisition Expediting Program Mission Capable (SEEREP MICAP), Required Delivery Date (RDD) 999 material, or other items critical to flying and marine safety

• Material mailed under the Uniform Material Movement and Issue Priority System (UMMIPS) priority designators 01 through 08 consigned to addressees located more than 300 miles from the sender

• Shipments of supply issue Group II material or I consigned to mobile units and overseas activities served by FPO or APO addresses.

Official mailings not qualifying as Priority Mail and weighing more than 13 ounces must be endorsed and sent as Parcel post is matter weighing more than 13 ounces, not mailed or required to be mailed as First-Class Mail, and not mailed at the Periodical rate of postage. Official mailings not required to be mailed First-Class or Priority Mail, and not exceeding 70 pounds or 108 inches in length and girth combined, must be endorsed and sent as Parcel Post.

Official mailings that have a critical required delivery date, but that do not qualify as First-Class or Priority Mail and are destined for addresses outside of the United States (including Alaska and Hawaii) may be sent as MOM. In addition to the class of mail endorsement (Parcel Post), this mail must have the abbreviation MOM boldly rubber-stamped or printed on the address side of the mail container.

Security

Proper security must be provided for official mail received from pickup to delivery. Handle and treat official Registered Mail™ as if it contained Secret material. Postage metering equipment must be

p. 681

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-15

given the best possible protection against loss or theft. Security of postage metering equipment is the responsibility of all personnel who work in mail centers or at other mail acceptance locations.

p. 682

LS Postal Fundamentals: Chapter 26— Official Mail Rev. MAR 2013 26-16

(This page was left blank intentionally).

p. 683

Rev. MAR 2013 27-1

CHAPTER 27

POST OFFICE AUDITS, REPORTS, AND INSPECTIONS

To determine business volume, check accuracy of records and the conduct of employees, private business firms schedule inventories and audits at periodic intervals. By analyzing records of inventories and audits, a corporation can determine whether the business is being operated efficiently and economically. The U.S. Postal Service (USPS) also requires periodic inspections and audits of military post offices, which serves the same purpose.

Audits, reports and inspections are management tools designed to ensure administrative and operational policies of the Military Postal Service (MPS) are adhered to. A record and/or a copy of each audit, report and inspection that is prepared becomes a part of the post office files. You must be able to locate information relating to these files, so it is imperative that you maintain neat and orderly files of all audits, inspections, reports, instructions, requisitions, official correspondence, notices and so on.

An audit or inspection on some aspect of your post office operation is conducted daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly and yearly (See Table 27-1).

In this chapter, we discuss the various audits, reports, inspections and records required to be completed and maintained at Navy post offices.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES

When you have completed this chapter, you will be able to do the following:

1. Distinguish between the different types of postal audits.

2. Understand the different reports, inspections, and assessments required at MPOs.

3. Remember the procedures for conducting postal audits.

4. Understand the types of military inspections post offices can expect and the types of reports required after the inspection.

5. Understand the different types of reports generated at a MPO.

6. Understand the procedures for setting up and maintaining postal files and records.

7. Understand procedures for the development of a command SOP and POP.

TYPES OF AUDITS

What is an audit? An audit is an inspection of accounts, including financial entries recorded on reports and records, which are checked for accuracy. The quantity of each denomination of stamps and stamped paper on hand are counted to determine their cash value, money order funds and blank money order forms are verified for correctness, and if applicable postage meter and stamp vending machine accounts are verified. There are three types of official audits that are conducted in a Military Post Office (MPO). The types of audits, the degree of frequency when each is performed, who performs the audit, and what is audited are as follows:

CHAPTER 27

p. 684

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-2

• MONTHLY AUDIT—A n audit conducted on each stamp stock account. The audit is unannounced and is conducted by two or more members of the command monies audit board. During the monthly audit, all postal effects such as stamp stock, money orders and postage meter accounts in custody of a Military Postal Clerk (MPC) or the Custodian of Postal Effects (COPE) must be audited. Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary, OPNAV Form 5112/2, must be completed on the same day. Stamped Credit Examination Record, PS Form 3368, is used to record the results of all required audit.

• QUARTERLY AUDIT—An audit conducted during the third month of each calendar quarter (March, June, September, December). This audit may count as both the monthly and quarterly audit and is conducted by two or more members of the command monies audit board.

• SPECIAL AUDIT—An audit conducted at the request of the Commanding Officer, or as required by the Department of Defense (DOD) or Department of Navy (DON) instructions. One example of a special audit is a CHANGE OF COPE AUDIT. This audit transfers the responsibility for accountable items from the outgoing COPE to the incoming COPE. The incoming and outgoing COPE and two or more members of the monies audit board must conduct this audit.

Monthly and quarterly audit must be unannounced and randomly spaced so they are not conducted on same dates each month.

NOTE

All audits conducted must be documented on PS Form 3368.

p. 685

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-3

Table 27-1 — Record of Audits, Reports and Inspections of Military Post Offices

RECORD OF INSPECTIONS and REPORTS FREQUENCY AUDIT, INSPECTION, or REPORT FORM USED INSPECTED BY

DAILY VERIFICATION OF CLERK/UNIT PS FORM 1412 (ASHORE)

VERIFICATION OF UNIT PS FORM 1412 (AFLOAT)

POSTAL OFFICER’S DAILY CHECKLIST (AFLOAT) PS FORM 1412

MERCHANT SALES & SUMMARY REPORT

AFLOAT CHECKLIST COPE COPE

POSTAL OFFICER

WEEKLY POSTAL OFFICER’S WEEKLY INSPECTION (ASHORE)

VERIFICATION OF UNIT MERCHANT SALES SUMMARY REPORT AND REGISTER REPORT (AFLOAT)

POSTAL OFFICER’S WEEKLY CHECKLIST (ASHORE) OPNAV 5119/1

MERCHANT SALES SUMMARY REPORT

ASHORE CHECKLIST POSTAL OFFICER

POSTAL OFFICER AND PAA

POSTAL OFFICER

MONTHLY

AUDIT OF CASH AND STAMP STOCK VERIFICATION OF ACCOUNTABLE USPS EQUIPMENT PS FORM 1412 OPNAV 5112/2 PS FORM 3368 PS F0RM 3958 PS FORM 1590 MONIES AUDIT BOARD MEMBERS/POSTAL OFFICER

QUARTERLY*

AUDIT OF CASH AND STAMP STOCK PS FORM 1412 OPNAV 5112/2 PS FORM 3368 PS FORM 3958 PS FORM 1590 MONIES AUDIT BOARD MEMBERS/POSTAL OFFICER

ANNUALLY POSTAL ASSESSMENT (ASHORE)

POSTAL ASSESSMENT (AFLOAT 18-24 MONTH)

OPNAV 5119/2

POSTAL ADVISOR

SPECIAL*

CHANGE OF COPE PS FORM 1412 OPNAV 5112/2 PS FORM 3368 PS FORM 3958 PS FORM 1590 MONIES AUDIT BOARD MEMBERS ANDPOSTAL OFFICER

There are other reasons when a special audit would be required; such as when a postal clerk has been hospitalized, is missing, or is Absent Without Leave (AWOL). Special audits also are required during postal investigations when funds are missing.

p. 686

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-4

Quarterly audits are conducted in the same manner as monthly audits. Quarterly audit results are required to be submitted to the Region Postal Manager. SPECIAL AUDIT—a n audit conducted at the request of the Commanding Officer, or as required by DOD or DON instructions. One example of a special audit is a CHANGE of COPE AUDIT. This audit transfers the responsibility for accountable items from the outgoing COPE to the incoming COPE. The incoming and outgoing COPE and two or more members of the monies audit board must conduct this audit.

There are other reasons when a special audit would be required, such as when a military postal clerk is hospitalized, is missing, or AWOL. Special audits also are required during postal investigations when funds are missing.

Stamp Stock accounts, as stated above, are officially audited on a monthly and quarterly basis and at any time required for special reasons. All audits must be documented and closely reviewed to determine the ability of individuals to manage that portion of the credit assigned to them.

REPORTS, INSPECTIONS, AND ASSESSMENTS

In this section, we cover the frequency of submission of required reports of MPO accounts, and the frequency of inspections and assessments that are performed at military post offices.

Daily Reports

When working with a flexible credit account, the COPE verifies the accuracy of the clerk’s account using a computer-generated Daily Financial Report, PS Form 1412-B detailing the business conducted by the finance clerk. This printout lists money orders sold and cashed, checks received, Postage Validation Imprinter (PVI) readings and the amount of currency the clerk should return to the COPE upon completion of that day’s business. Money orders are retained until they are all used.

Daily/Weekly Inspections

The Postal Officer must inspect the post office spaces using the Postal Officer’s Weekly Inspection Checklist. Ashore based post offices will use the Postal Officer’s Weekly Inspection Checklist, OPNAV Form 5119/1, (Figure 27-1) and afloat post offices will use The Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly Checklist, (Figure 27-2). The Postal Officer also should note the equipment condition and the related safety hazards. Safety hazards must be corrected at once. General appearance of the postal spaces also should be noted. When the post office is neat and orderly, it sets a good example. Properly stowed items also must be checked. Always keep your post office inspection ready.

p. 687

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-5

Figure 27-1 — An example of a Postal Officer’s Weekly Checklist (Ashore), OPNAV Form 5119/1.

p. 688

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-6

Figure 27-2. — Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly Checklist. (Page 1 of 5) (Continued)

Figure 27-2 — Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly Checklist. (Page 2 of 5) (Continued)

p. 689

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-7

Figure 27-2 — Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly Checklist. (Page 3 of 5) (Continued)

Figure 27-2 — Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly. (Page 4 of 5) (Continued)

p. 690

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-8

Figure 27-2 — Afloat Navy Post Office Daily/Weekly Checklist. (Page 5 of 5) (Continued)

Postal Assessments

Postal Assessments must be conducted annually for overseas shore-based post offices, and between 18-24 months for shipboard post offices. Shipboard post offices are inspected in conjunction with Supply Management Certification (SMC). Postal assessments are covered later in this chapter.

AUDITING FLEXIBLE CREDIT ACCOUNTS

Stamps and postal stationery are issued to FPO AE and AA commands by USPS Stamp Distribution Center (SDC), Binghamton, NY and FPO AP commands by SDC Phoenix, AZ as flexible credit.

Flexible credit is an initial amount of credit extended to a COPE or PFO by the U.S. Postal Service for ordering accountable paper. A stamp sales remittance reduces the amount of credit, while stamp requisitions increase the credit.

The total amount of flexible credit carried by a MPO depends upon the estimated number of persons to be served.

The flexible accounting system provides more latitude in stamp requisitioning as funds are not submitted with requisitions to obtain stamps and stamped paper. A PFO or COPE’s accountability for stamps and stamped paper under this system is reduced, based on stamp sales remittances, and increased when stamp requisitions are received.

Official audits of a MPC’s account are made by the command monies audit board members. However, accounts used to conduct window sales also may be audited at any time by the COPE or Postal Officer.

p. 691

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-9

To conduct a proper inspection and audit, auditors must be familiar with the DOD Postal Manual (DOD 4525.6M), all applicable portions of the Navy Postal Instruction (OPNAVINST 5112.6 series) and the NAVSUP Postal Finance Officer Handbook (NAVSUP Pub 725).

By making these instructions available and by assisting in every way possible, you will ensure an accurate inspection.

Tolerance Limits

Once the audit is completed, and all figures are totaled and verified, there is a chance that the account may be over or short of the credit amount. Tolerance limits were established for this purpose. Tolerance limits apply only to credits of finance clerks conducting window transactions with customers. Tolerance limits for flexible credit accounts are 1% of the flexible credit. The PFO and COPE are not allowed a tolerance.

Audit Results

Overages and shortages within tolerance limits are carried forward to the next audit. The disposition of overages and shortages in excess of the tolerance limits is as follows:

• The entire amount of an overage, to include the tolerance, is collected by the auditor and turned over to the COPE. The COPE will prepare a Cash Receipt, PS Form 1096, in duplicate. The clerk receives the original and the COPE retains the duplicate copy in the MPO files. For flexible credit accounts, the COPE provides the clerk with a PS Form 1096, and then adjusts the clerk's account using the “trust” function of the account and Account Indicator Code (AIC) 057.

• At the time of the audit, the postal financial clerk replaces shortages, including the amount of tolerance. The COPE provides the clerk with a receipt for the amount. With flexible accounts, an additional procedure is required by the COPE, the restitution is documented using the “suspense” function

• Under certain circumstances, an overage in one clerk’s credit may offset a shortage in another clerk’s credit. The transfer of funds is documented using the PS Form 1096, prepared and signed by the receiving clerk, and provided as a receipt to the clerk relinquishing the funds. This can be done only when the auditor has proof that the two clerks exchanged money or stamp stock

• During audits, individual credit accounts do not require re-auditing when a shortage or overage exists within tolerance limits. Carry these differences forward to the next audit. However, if the individual being audited requests a re-audit, the auditor shall comply. If the re-audit agrees with the original audit, no further audits are required.

NOTE

All audits must be documented on PS Form 3368 assigned the specific clerk.

p. 692

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-10

Verification of PS Form 1590

When the auditors complete their count of the entire command credit for the MPO, verification shall be conducted of all capital equipment assigned to the MPO that was receipted for on Supplies and Equipment Receipt, PS Form 1590. PS Form 1590 should be printed from the Automated Military Postal System (AMPS). The PS Form 1590 in AMPS is regarded as the unit’s official receipt. Any locally derived versions of the PS Form 1590 shall not be used. All items listed on PS Form 1590 should be cited and all serial numbers verified. Any missing items will be reported as a postal offense or loss as outlined in the DOD Postal Manual.

Preparing OPNAV Form 5112/2 for Flexible Credit Accounts

When conducting a flexible credit audit, the auditor completes a Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary, OPNAV Form 5112/2 (Figure 27-3). A separate OPNAV Form 5112/2 is completed for each account audited. Complete OPNAV Form 5112/2 as follows:

Complete the Heading

1. Type of Account. Check as appropriate. COPEs with a window account will use a separate audit form and check Clerk Account.

2. Name of Clerk. [Print the individual clerk’s name]/Clerk ID No., FPO number, SFA Number, Time and Date of Audit, Name of Auditors (minimum of two), and Unit Name.

Cash and Cash Items on Hand

3. Count each type of currency ($20.00, $10.00, .25 cents, etc.) and enter the number in the quantity column. Multiply the quantities by the denominations, and enter the result in the amount column. Total the amount column and enter the result in line 26, total cash.

4. Enter the total amount of personal and business checks to line 27, government checks to line 28, paid money orders to line 29, traveler’s checks to line 30, credit/debit/PPC card receipts to line 31, and all others to line 32.

5. Total lines 26 through 32, and enter the result on line 33, Total Cash and Cash Items on Hand, and place in line 1, column II, Total Cash and Cash Items on Hand.

Add Back Paid-out Items (Disbursements)

6. Enter any cash paid out shown by receipts in lines 2 through 5, column I.

7. Total them and enter the result to line 5, column II. Add lines 1 and 5, column II.

8. Enter the result in line 6, column II.

Complete Blocks 7-16 if the Business was Conducted Prior to the Audit

8. Enter the following amounts:

o the total amount of money order vouchers in line 7 o the total amount of customer meters, Receipt for Postage Meter Settings, PS Form 3603 to line 10

o the total amount of post office meters/PVI, Postage Collected Through Post Office Meter, (PS Form 3602-PO & current reading) in line 11

o the total amount of retail packaging products in line 13

p. 693

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-11

9.

10.

11.

o the total amount of money order fees (number of money order vouchers x .25) in line 14.

Total lines 7 through 16, column I. Enter the result in line 16, column II. Subtract line 16, column II from line 6, column II and enter the results in line 17, column II. This amount may exceed the maximum authorized cash portion of the clerk’s stamp credit as a result of stamp sales.

Stamp Count

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Count each item of stamp stock and enter the number in the appropriate blocks on page 2. Multiply the total number of each item by its face value. Count and multiply redeemed stock consisting of stamped cards, stamped envelopes, and U.S. international reply coupons by the applicable redemption rate. Enter the result to the appropriate block, by type, and total the amount.

Total all blocks on page 2 of OPNAV Form 5112/2 and enter the result of stamp stock counted on line 18, column 1.

Enter total amount of advanced credits to clerks or total amount of clerk balances from Unit 1412 (flex credit) to line 19, column I. These amounts must also be entered on the “Advanced Credit” sheet that is completed with OPNAV Form 5112/2.

Enter amount from Stamp Requisition, PS Form 17, showing stock in transit from the COPE to the appropriate PFO/postmaster to line 20, column I. Verify the validity of PS Form 17 with the source of stock.

Total lines 18 through 20, column I, and enter on line 20, column II.

Total Cash and Stamp Stock

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25. Add lines 17 and 20, column II, and enter the total cash and stamp stock on line 21, column II. Enter the Opening Balance Stamps, AIC 840, plus Cash Retained, AIC 353 (flex credit) to line 22, column II.

o Unit 1412’s should be verified by checking the previous day’s unit 1412, AIC 853 (stamps close) against the next day’s unit 1412, AIC 840 (stamps open); AIC 853 and 840 must match. Verify all unit 1412s submitted since the previous audit.

Subtract line 22 from line 21, column II and enter the difference to line 23, column II.

Enter the amount of tolerance for this credit on line 24. COPEs and PFOs have no tolerance. Tolerance for clerks is 1 percent of the amount listed on the last PS Form 1412.

If the difference amount exceeds the tolerance and the parties involved cannot agree with the count, recount the stamp credit account at the request of the postal clerk. After identifying the amount of overage or shortage, bring the stamp account into balance.

If there is a shortage, report it in “Suspense Adjustment” to the column marked action taken on line 25.

For an overage amount exceeding the tolerance, report it by checking the “Trust” block on line 25.

p. 694

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-12

PFO/COPE Monthly Checklist

26.

27.

28.

The top portion of this page is for PFO and COPE accounts. When auditing clerk accounts skip to Verification of Money Orders section.

The auditor shall inventory all accountable equipment listed on a “Supplies and Equipment Receipt”, PS Form 1590. The cash drawer, stamp cabinet, safe compartment and envelope drawer must also be checked to ensure no unauthorized items are stowed in these containers.

Verify Duplicate Key Envelope, PS Form 3977. Ensure signatures are current and envelopes are sealed and postmarked.

Summary of PFO/COPE Stamp Stock Accountability

29.

Enter the total of stamp stock from page 2 to page 3 under Summary of PFO/COPE Stamp Stock Accountability. For a COPE or PFO account, indicate whether OPNAV Form 5112/2 was correct or has been corrected. Enter the difference, whether over or short, and action taken.

Verification of Financial Records

30.

Check Yes/No/NA, as applicable, to all questions listed in this section.

Verification of Money Orders

31.

Inspect blank domestic money orders to ensure they are being sold in sequence, and no money orders are missing.

Notes, etc.

32.

This section must be annotated with the statement, “Commanding Officer (CO) has reviewed this audit. CO’s initials.” Also, list any other remarks applicable to the current audit.

Advance Flexible/Fixed Credit Worksheet

Page 4 of the OPNAV Form 5112/2 will only be filled out for the COPE. The purpose of this form is account for all advanced credit that has been issued to Postal Clerks. The page contains the following information for each clerk: Clerk Name, Clerk ID#, Unit 1412 Balance for the Clerk and a Remarks Section.

Quarterly Audit Remarks Sheet

Page 5 of the OPNAV Form 5112/2 is to be filled out only during the quarterly audits. The purpose of this form is to provide a synopsis of all audit-related information to the PFO. It contains the following information:

• Audit Date

• Section 1: Date of the Last Postal Assessment Visit

• Section 2: Name, e-mail address and date of designation for the command Postal Officer

• Section 3: Name, e-mail address and date of designation for the finance unit COPE.

• Section 4: Results of all 3 monthly audits conducted during the quarter. Information includes: Rank, Name, Projected Rotation Date (PRD), Account type, audit date, AIC 840 + AIC 353 Total, Stamps Total, Cash Total, overage or shortage amount, Total value of accounts

p. 695

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-13

advanced for the COPE, Total Value of Account (Audit Results) and Amount of Money Orders on hand.

• Section 5: Stamp Requisitions originated this quarter. This lists only the requisitions between the COPE and the Postmaster.

Notes, etc.

33. This section must be annotated with the statement, “Commanding Officer has reviewed this audit. CO’s initials.” Also, list any other remarks applicable to the current audit.

Advance Flexible/Fixed Credit Worksheet

Page 4 of the OPNAV Form 5112/2 will be filled out only for the COPE. The purpose of this form is to account for all advanced credit that has been issued to Postal Clerks. The page contains the following information for each clerk: Clerk Name, Clerk ID#, Unit 1412 Balance for the Clerk and a Remarks Section.

p. 696

LS: Chapter 27— Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections Rev. MAR 2013 27-14

Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary Type of account PFO Account Clerk Account

COPE Account Audit Type Monthly Other (i.e. Special Audit, Quarterly Account Turnover) Name of Clerk/Clerk ID No. FPO Number SFA No. Time and Date of Audit PC1 Peckskamp 09645 1234 0800 15Mar06 Name of Auditors Unit Name PCCM Hass/PCCM Ramsey FMC ROTA Summary of Accountability (Attach a preliminary Form 1412 if applicable) Cash and Cash Items on Hand 1. Total Cash and Cash Items on Hand (Line 33) Col. I Col. II Denomi- nation

Quantity

Amount $500.00 Add Back Paid Out Items (Disbursements):

$100.00 0 $0.00 2. Refunds 3. Other $50.00 2 $100.00 4. Other $20.00 7 $140.00 5. Other Tot. 2 thru 5, Col. I $10.00 3 $30.00 $0.00 6. Cash That Was Available Before Paid Outs 1 + 5, Col. II $5.00 11 $55.00 $500.00 Complete Blocks 7-16 if Business was Conducted Prior to Audit

$2.00 0 $0.00 7. Money Order Vouchers $1.00 153 $153.00 8. Forms 3544 0.50 0 $0.00 9. COD Tags 0.25 40 $10.00 10. Customer Meters, Forms 3603 0.10 20 $2.00 11. Postage Meter/PVI (Form 3602-PO/Current Reading) 0.05 160 $8.00 12. Box Rentals, Forms 1538 0.01 200 $2.00 13. Retail Packaging Products 26. Total Cash $500.00 14. Money Order Fees 27. Total Personal / Business Checks

15. Other 28. Total Government Checks 16. Other Tot. 7 thru 16, Col. I $0.00 29. Total Paid Money Orders 17. Cash Portion of Stamp Credit 6 - 16, Col. II $500.00 30. Total Traveler's Checks 18. Stamp Stock as Counted $4,310.25 31. Total Credit / Debit / PPC Card Receipts 19. Fixed: Advanced Credits to Clerk Flex: Unit 1412 Clerk Balances $961.03 32. Other (Describe) 20. Stock in Transit (Not applicable to clerks) (Returned but still in accountability) Tot. 18 thru 20, Col. I $5,271.28 33. Total Cash (Total 26 thru 32)

$500.00 21. Total Cash, Stamps & Advanced Credits (Fixed) or Clerk Balances (Flex) Tot. 17 + 20 Col. II $5,771.28 22. Open Balance (AIC840) + Cash Ret.(AIC353) (Flex) PS 3369 advanced from PFO (Fixed) $5,771.28

APDS 23. Difference Overage/Shortage 21 - 22, Col. II $0.00 24. Amount of Tolerance for this Credit $0.00 25. Action Taken When Out of Tolerance Trust Suspense Form 571 OPNAV Form 5112/2 (Feb 06) (Page 1 of 5) S/N 0108-LF-128-2200

Figure 27-3 — An example of a Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary, OPNAV Form 5112/2. (Page 1 of 5)

p. 697

LS: Chapter 27—Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections

STAMP CREDIT INVENTORY SHEET

PART I - STAMPS AND PAPER STOCK PART II - OLD STAMPS QTY ITEM VALUE .37 Cent Stamps QTY ITEM VALUE 1000 $0.01 $ 10.00 NAME QTY $ - $0.02 $ - FLAG 500 $ - 200 $0.03 $ 6.00 KWANZA 200 $0.21 $ - $0.04 $ - HANAKAH 100 $0.22 $ - $0.05 $ - $0.33 $ - $0.10 $ - $0.34 $ - $0.23 $ - $0.55 $ - $0.30 $ - $0.76 $ - 800 $0.37 $ 296.00 $3.50 $ - $0.45 $ - $12.25 $ - $0.50 $ - $2.10 $ - $0.60 $ - $3.40 $ - $0.70 $ - $6.80 $ - $0.76 $ - $0.42 $ - $0.80 $ - TOTAL OLD STAMPS: $ - $0.83 $ - $1.00 $ - DAMAGED $2.00 $ - QTY ITEM VALUE $3.85 $ - $2.00 $ - $5.00 $ - $0.05 $ - $13.65 $ - $ - BOOKS REMARKS: $ - 100 $2.30 $ 230.00 POSTCARDS/ENVELOPES 300 $3.70 $ 1,110.00 QTY ITEM VALUE 300 $7.40 $ 2,220.00 .70 AEROGRAM $ - $ - 250 .45 SMALL $ 112.50 $ - 300 .45 LARGE $ 135.00 $ - 25 .23 STAMPED CARD $ 5.75 $ - $ - $ - $ - COILS $ - 5 $37.00 $ 185.00 $ - $ - $ - TOTAL $0.37 STAMPS 800 $ -

TOTAL STAMPS AND PAPER STOCK: $ 4,310.25

OPNAV Form 5112/2 (Feb 06) (Page 2 of 5) S/N 0108-LF-128-2200

Figure 27-3 — An example of a Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary, OPNAV Form 5112/2. (Page 2 of 5) (Continued)

LS: Chapter 27—Post Office Audits, Reports, and Inspections

STAMP CREDIT INVENTORY SHEET

PART I - STAMPS AND PAPER STOCK PART II - OLD STAMPS QTY ITEM VALUE .37 Cent Stamps QTY ITEM VALUE 1000 $0.01 $ 10.00 NAME $ - $0.02 $ - FLAG 500 $ - 200 $0.03 $ 6.00 KWANZA 200 $0.21 $ - $0.04 $ - HANAKAH 100 $0.22 $ - $0.05 $ - $0.33 $ - $0.10 $ - $0.34 $ - $0.23 $ - $0.55 $ - $0.30 $ - $0.76 $ - 800 $0.37 $ 296.00 $3.50 $ - $0.45 $ - $12.25 $ - $0.50 $ - $2.10 $ - $0.60 $ - $3.40 $ - $0.70 $ - $6.80 $ - $0.76 $ - $0.42 $ - $0.80 $ - TOTAL OLD STAMPS: $ - $0.83 $ - $1.00 $ - DAMAGED $2.00 $ - QTY ITEM VALUE $3.85 $ - $2.00 $ - $5.00 $ - $0.05 $ - $13.65 $ - $ $ - BOOKS REMARKS: $ $ - 100 $2.30 $ 230.00 300 $3.70 $ 1,110.00 POSTCARDS/ENVELOPES 300 $7.40 $ 2,220.00 QTY ITEM VALUE $ - .70 AEROGRAM $ - $ - 250 .45 SMALL $ 112.50 $ - 300 .45 LARGE $ 135.00 $ - 25 .23 STAMPED CARD $ 5.75 $ - $ - $ - $ - COILS $ - 5 $37.00 $ 185.00 $ - $ - $ - $ - TOTAL $0.37 STAMPS 800 $ -

TOTAL STAMPS AND PAPER STOCK: $ 4,310.25

OPNAV Form 5112/2 (Feb 06) (Page 2 of 5) S/N 0108-LF-128-2200

Figure 27-3 — An example of a Cash and Stamp Stock Count and Summary, OPNAV Form 5112/2. (Page 2 of 5) (Continued)

Rev. MAR 2013 27-15

· 2/4